You are on page 1of 228

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge Optical Transport

Platform
V100R001

Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Issue

02

Date

2010-09-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1
1 Guide to This Document..........................................................................................................1-1
2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment...................2-1
3 Preparations.................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Preparing Documents......................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Preparing Tools, Meters, and Materials..........................................................................................................3-3

4 Commissioning Optical Power................................................................................................4-1


4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical Amplifiers...................................................................................4-2
4.2 Commissioning a System with Optical Amplifiers.........................................................................................4-4
4.3 Checking the Optical Power Commissioning Results.....................................................................................4-7

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network...................................................................5-1


5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs......................................................................................................................5-4
5.2 Creating Optical NEs......................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3 Changing the ID and Name of an NE.............................................................................................................5-8
5.4 Changing the IP Address of an NE...............................................................................................................5-12
5.5 Configuring Ethernet Extended ECC............................................................................................................5-14
5.6 Configuring IP over DCC.............................................................................................................................5-18
5.7 Configuring Board Parameters......................................................................................................................5-20
5.7.1 Configuring the LDGF Board..............................................................................................................5-21
5.7.2 Configuring the LDGF2 Board............................................................................................................5-24
5.7.3 Configuring the LOE Board.................................................................................................................5-27
5.7.4 Configuring the LOEL Board..............................................................................................................5-30
5.7.5 Configuring the LOEU Board..............................................................................................................5-32
5.7.6 Configuring the LQG Board................................................................................................................5-34
5.7.7 Configuring the LQM Board................................................................................................................5-37
5.7.8 Configuring the LQM2 Board..............................................................................................................5-44
5.7.9 Configuring the LSPL or LSPU Board................................................................................................5-54
5.7.10 Configuring the LSPR Board.............................................................................................................5-56
5.7.11 Configuring the LSX Board...............................................................................................................5-58
5.7.12 Configuring the LWX2 Board............................................................................................................5-61
5.7.13 Configuring the SCC Board...............................................................................................................5-65
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Contents

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5.8 Creating Fibers..............................................................................................................................................5-66


5.9 Configuring Cross-Connection Service........................................................................................................5-68
5.10 Configuring Services in Service Package Mode.........................................................................................5-70
5.11 Configuring SW SNCP Protection..............................................................................................................5-74
5.12 Configuring Port Protection........................................................................................................................5-77
5.13 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS Time.......................................................................................5-87
5.14 Starting NE Performance Monitoring.........................................................................................................5-89
5.15 Searching and Creating WDM Trails..........................................................................................................5-91
5.16 Checking Configurations in the Commissioning Process...........................................................................5-94
5.17 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board........................................................................................5-95
5.18 Checking Optical Power of Boards.............................................................................................................5-96
5.19 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FEC..............................................................................................5-100
5.20 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms.....................................................5-102
5.21 Testing Protection Switching....................................................................................................................5-104
5.21.1 Testing SW SNCP Switching...........................................................................................................5-104
5.21.2 Testing Port Protection Switching....................................................................................................5-107
5.22 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power and Alarm Data..................................................5-109
5.23 Backing Up NE Data to the NMS Server or Client...................................................................................5-110

A Handling Common Commissioning Problems..................................................................A-1


A.1 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports an OTU1_LOF Alarm.....................A-2
A.2 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports a LINK_ERR Alarm.......................A-3
A.3 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LWX2 Board Reports the R_LOC Alarm..........................A-4
A.4 The Receive Optical Power is Normal But an OTU Board Reports an REM_SF Alarm.............................A-4
A.5 The Optical Path Is Reachable But the NE Cannot Be Logged in Remotely................................................A-5

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration.................................B-1


B.1 Obtaining NE IP Addresses at the Site..........................................................................................................B-3
B.2 Creating a Single NE.....................................................................................................................................B-4
B.3 Checking the NE Software Version...............................................................................................................B-5
B.4 Creating an NE User......................................................................................................................................B-6
B.5 Switching a Logged-In NE User....................................................................................................................B-7
B.6 Modifying the Optical NE Name...................................................................................................................B-7
B.7 Modifying GNE Parameters..........................................................................................................................B-8
B.8 Changing the GNE for NEs...........................................................................................................................B-8
B.9 Deleting an NE...............................................................................................................................................B-9
B.10 Enabling the Proxy ARP............................................................................................................................B-10
B.11 Configuring Static Routing........................................................................................................................B-10
B.12 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status...........................................................................................................B-11
B.13 Configuring the NE Data...........................................................................................................................B-11
B.13.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually..................................................................................................B-11
B.13.2 Uploading the NE Data.....................................................................................................................B-12
B.14 Configuring Boards....................................................................................................................................B-13
B.14.1 Adding Boards..................................................................................................................................B-13
ii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

B.14.2 Deleting Boards................................................................................................................................B-13


B.15 Performance Management.........................................................................................................................B-14
B.15.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold........................................................................................B-14
B.15.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board..................................................................B-15
B.15.3 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE....................................................................B-15
B.15.4 Resetting Board Performance Registers...........................................................................................B-15
B.16 Modifying the Services Configuration.......................................................................................................B-16
B.16.1 Deleting Cross-Connection Service..................................................................................................B-16
B.16.2 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service..............................................................B-17
B.17 Switching the Working Mode of the LQM2..............................................................................................B-17
B.18 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data....................................................................................................B-19
B.18.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods.............................................................B-20
B.18.2 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board.............................................................................B-21
B.18.3 Restoring Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client....................................................B-22
B.19 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode..................................................................................................B-23
B.20 Configuring Services by Creating WDM Trails........................................................................................B-24

C Service Configuration Examples...........................................................................................C-1


C.1 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service...................................................................... C-2
C.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram.....................................................................................................C-2
C.1.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation.................................................................................C-3
C.1.3 Configuration Process (In the Service Package Mode)........................................................................C-4
C.1.4 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................... C-5
C.2 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services..................................................................C-7
C.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram.....................................................................................................C-7
C.2.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation.................................................................................C-8
C.2.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................... C-9
C.3 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service.................................................................C-11
C.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...................................................................................................C-11
C.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation...............................................................................C-12
C.3.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................C-13
C.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services................................................................C-14
C.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...................................................................................................C-14
C.4.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation...............................................................................C-15
C.4.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................C-16
C.5 Configuring the Hybrid Transmission of the GE/STM-1 Services in the Service Package Mode..............C-18
C.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...................................................................................................C-18
C.5.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation...............................................................................C-19
C.5.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................C-20

D Parameter Reference............................................................................................................... D-1


D.1 Attributes of NEs...........................................................................................................................................D-2
D.2 Attributes of NE Users..................................................................................................................................D-2
D.3 NE Time Synchronization.............................................................................................................................D-5
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Contents

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D.4 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration........................................................................................................D-8


D.5 Port Protection Parameters............................................................................................................................D-9
D.6 SNCP Service Control Parameters..............................................................................................................D-12

E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
..........................................................................................................................................................E-1
E.1 Connecting the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool...............................................................................E-2
E.2 Logging in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool...........................................................................E-3
E.3 Checking the Self-Check Report of the Equipment.......................................................................................E-4
E.4 Setting NE Attributes.....................................................................................................................................E-5
E.5 Checking and Adjusting the Optical Power...................................................................................................E-6
E.6 Configuring ECC............................................................................................................................................E-7

F Glossary.......................................................................................................................................F-1
G Acronyms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................G-1

iv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Figures

Figures
Figure 4-1 Example of a system without OAs.....................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2 Example of a system with OAs..........................................................................................................4-6
Figure 5-1 NE connections at a station..............................................................................................................5-15
Figure A-1 LDGF board networking mode.........................................................................................................A-2
Figure A-2 Schematic diagram of the OTU board reporting the REM_SF alarm..............................................A-5
Figure A-3 Schematic diagram of the network of the LDGF2 board..................................................................A-6
Figure C-1 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service......................................................................C-2
Figure C-2 Unidirectional service on each NE....................................................................................................C-3
Figure C-3 Wavelength allocation diagram.........................................................................................................C-3
Figure C-4 Configuration networking diagram of the SAN service...................................................................C-8
Figure C-5 Unidirectional service on each NE....................................................................................................C-8
Figure C-6 Wavelength allocation diagram.........................................................................................................C-9
Figure C-7 Configuration networking diagram of the OTN service.................................................................C-11
Figure C-8 Unidirectional service on each NE..................................................................................................C-12
Figure C-9 Wavelength allocation diagram.......................................................................................................C-12
Figure C-10 Configuration networking diagram of the SDH service...............................................................C-15
Figure C-11 Unidirectional service on each NE................................................................................................C-15
Figure C-12 Wavelength allocation diagram.....................................................................................................C-16
Figure C-13 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service and STM-1 service..................................C-18
Figure C-14 Unidirectional service on each NE................................................................................................C-19
Figure C-15 Wavelength allocation diagram.....................................................................................................C-19

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Tables

Tables
Table 2-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment during
deployment............................................................................................................................................................2-1
Table 5-1 ECC setting plan................................................................................................................................5-15
Table 5-2 Number of timeslots required by common services...........................................................................5-38
Table 5-3 Number of timeslots required by GE services...................................................................................5-39
Table 5-4 Number of timeslots required by common services...........................................................................5-45
Table 5-5 Number of timeslots required by GE services...................................................................................5-46
Table 5-6 Service rates of common service types..............................................................................................5-62
Table 5-7 Service configurations for the LQM board in service package mode................................................5-71
Table 5-8 Service configurations for the LQM2 board in service package mode..............................................5-71
Table 5-9 Service configurations for the LWX2 board in service package mode..............................................5-72
Table 5-10 Requirements for setting key parameters of SW SNCP protection.................................................5-75
Table 5-11 Differences between different port protection types........................................................................5-78
Table 5-12 Requirements for setting parameters of different protection types..................................................5-80
Table 5-13 Configuration checklist....................................................................................................................5-94
Table B-1 Backup and restoration methods and application scenarios.............................................................B-20
Table D-1 NE user parameters............................................................................................................................D-2
Table D-2 Descriptions of the WDM service parameters....................................................................................D-8
Table D-3 Protection Group Parameters..............................................................................................................D-9
Table D-4 Channel Status Parameters...............................................................................................................D-11

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

About This Document

About This Document


Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name

Version

OptiX OSN 1800

V100R001

OptiX iManager T2000

V200R007C03

OptiX iManager T2000 Web


LCT

V200R007C03

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:
l

Installation and Commissioning Engineer

Data Configuration Engineer

Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows:
Symbol

Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and
performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

About This Document

Symbol

Description
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
you time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or
supplement important points of the main text.

GUI Conventions
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in


boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For
example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-09-30) Based on Product Version


V100R001
The updated contents are as follows:
l

The section "Configuring PRBS Test" is deleted and the corresponding contents are added
in the section "PRBS Error Detection Function" in Feature Description.

Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-06-30) Based on Product Version


V100R001
Initial commercial release.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Guide to This Document

Guide to This Document

This document helps you commission and configure the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment easily and
effectively.
Organized according to the tasks involved in the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX
OSN 1800 equipment, this document guides you to complete the commissioning and
configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. Before reading this document, you are advised
to master the following knowledge:
l

Basic knowledge of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment


Read the OptiX OSN 1800 product manuals, such as Product Description, Hardware
Description, and Feature Description.

Basic knowledge of installing and operating the OptiX iManager T2000 and OptiX
iManager T2000 Web LCT
Read manuals, such as Installation Guide and Operation Guide for the OptiX iManager
T2000 and Web LCT User Guide for the OptiX iManager T2000 Web LCT.

After mastering the preceding knowledge, read this document as follows:


1.

See 2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment to have
a general idea of the tasks involved in the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX
OSN 1800 equipment and sequence of the tasks.
Generally, you do not need to perform all tasks listed in 2 List of Tasks for Commissioning
and Configuration During Deployment for a network. Instead, you can perform the
necessary tasks according to the actual network configuration and networking planning and
design.
If you are experienced in commissioning and configuring the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment,
have mastered the commissioning and configuration knowledge, and can use the
commissioning tools skillfully, you can take this document as reference.

2.

To understand the specific operations and precautions of a task listed in 2 List of Tasks
for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment, you can click the matching
link of the task to access the page that describes the details about the task.
The operation methods of how a task is performed by using multiple commissioning tools
are provided. In an actual project, only one commissioning tool is used. Therefore, you can
perform the task according to the relevant description of the commissioning tool. The
operation methods of different commissioning tools are similar. They serve reference for
each other in actual commissioning. Certain tasks can be performed in various methods on

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Guide to This Document

a commissioning tool. This document describes only the most common method. For other
operation methods, see Reference Information of the tasks.
When a task is complete, see 2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration
During Deployment for the next one.
3.

If you need to know more about a task, for example, optional operation methods of the task,
see Reference Information of the task. Reference Information describes the handling
process of common problems, relevant operations, examples, and parameter description
associated with the task.
NOTE

You can also find the contents in Reference Information in the appendix of this document.
Nevertheless, you are recommended to read the contents from Reference Information of each task.
This helps you to better understand the relationships between operations.

1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During


Deployment

List of Tasks for Commissioning and


Configuration During Deployment

Complete the deployment of an OptiX OSN 1800 network according to the tasks listed in this
section. Perform the tasks in sequence; otherwise, NEs may be unreachable and you may need
to handle problems on site.
You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the OptiX OSN
1800 equipment by using either the OptiX iManager T2000 (hereinafter referred to as T2000)
or the OptiX iManager T2000 Web LCT (hereinafter referred to as Web LCT). All the operations
that can be performed on the Web LCT can be performed on the T2000. Compared with the
T2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the computer hardware and can be started
quickly.
In actual commissioning, you can omit the tasks that are supported by only the T2000 when
performing the commissioning and configuration on the Web LCT. After performing the
commissioning and configuration on the Web LCT, you can configure the network-level
functions on the T2000.
Table 2-1 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800
equipment during deployment.
Table 2-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800
equipment during deployment

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

No.

Task

Mandato
ry/
Optional

Tool

Prepare the reference documents for the


commissioning. The reference documents include
the engineering design documents, and blank station
bar code labels.

Mandatory

Template and
designing tools

Prepare tools, meters, and materials required for


the commissioning. Download and install the Web
LCT or T2000.

Mandatory

None

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During


Deployment

No.

Task

Mandato
ry/
Optional

Tool

Complete commissioning the optical power. Then Mandatory


reclaim and keep properly the station bar code return
table.

None

Connect NEs to the Web LCT or T2000. Start and


log in to the Web LCT or T2000. Then, search and
create the NEs on the Web LCT or T2000.

Mandatory

Web LCT or
T2000

Create optical NEs on the T2000.

Mandatory
on the
T2000

T2000

Query the SCC electronic label of an NE. Then find


the NE in the station bar code return table according
to the queried bar code to determine the location of
the NE. Then change the ID and name of the NE
according to the NE ID planning provided by the
customer.

Mandatory

Web LCT or
T2000

Change the IP address of an NE according to the


IP address planning provided by the customer.

Mandatory
for
gateway
NEs and
optional
for other
NEs

Web LCT or
T2000

When the network adopts HWECC communication,


configure Ethernet extended ECC.

Mandatory Web LCT or


when the
T2000
number of
NEs that
adopt ECC
extended
communic
ation
exceeds
nine and
optional
for other
situations

When the network adopts IP over DCC


communication, configure IP over DCC.

Optional

Web LCT or
T2000

Configure the parameters of the LWX2, LDGF,


LDGF2, LQM, LQM2, LQG, LOE, LOEL,
LOEU, LSPL/LSPU, LSPR, LSX, and SCC
boards.

Mandatory

Web LCT or
T2000

2-2

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During


Deployment

No.

Task

Mandato
ry/
Optional

Tool

10

Create optical fibers in either graphic mode or list


mode on the T2000.

Mandatory
on the
T2000

T2000

11

Configure services.

Mandatory
according
to the
network
design and
actual
board
configurati
on

Web LCT or
T2000

l In the case of the LQM2 or LQG board,


configure cross-connections for each NE.
l In the case of the LWX2, LQM2, or LQM board,
you can use the service package mode to quickly
configure services.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

12

In the case of the LQM2 or LQG board, configure


SW SNCP protection.

Mandatory
according
to the
network
design and
actual
board
configurati
on

Web LCT or
T2000

13

Configure port protection, including intra-board 1


+1 protection, optical line protection, client-side 1
+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel
protection.

Mandatory
according
to the
network
design

Web LCT or
T2000

14

Synchronize the NE time with the NMS time.

Mandatory

Web LCT or
T2000

15

Enable the NE performance monitoring.

Mandatory

Web LCT or
T2000

16

Search and create WDM trails.

Mandatory
on the
T2000

T2000

17

Check the configuration to ensure that the network


configuration is correct.

Mandatory

Web LCT or
T2000

18

Back up the NE database to the SCC board.

Mandatory
on the
T2000

T2000

19

Query the optical power. Check and ensure that


the optical power is normal.

Mandatory

Web LCT or
T2000

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During


Deployment

2-4

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

No.

Task

Mandato
ry/
Optional

Tool

20

Query the bit errors. Ensure that the bit errors


before and after FEC are normal.

Mandatory

Web LCT or
T2000

21

Query the current alarms of an NE. Analyze and


remove abnormal alarms.

Mandatory

Web LCT or
T2000

22

Issue manual switching commands to test the port


protection switching and SW SNCP protection.

Mandatory
when the
port
protection
or SW
SNCP
protection
is
configured

Web LCT or
T2000

23

Query and save the networkwide optical power


and alarm data.

Mandatory

T2000

24

Back up the equipment data to the NMS server


or client.

Mandatory

T2000

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Preparations

Preparations

About This Chapter


Before the deployment, collect the network data and understand the network design and
configuration. In the process of installing the equipment, guide the hardware installation
engineers to connect fibers and install optical attenuators as required. Before the commissioning
and configuration, prepare the commissioning tools and reference documents for the
commissioning.
3.1 Preparing Documents
For a deployment of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, you need to prepare documents, including
station bar code return table, engineering design documents, and product manuals, according to
the actual project.
3.2 Preparing Tools, Meters, and Materials
You are recommended to use the Web LCT for the commissioning and configuration of the
OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. The version of the commissioning tool must match the equipment
version.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Preparations

3.1 Preparing Documents


For a deployment of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, you need to prepare documents, including
station bar code return table, engineering design documents, and product manuals, according to
the actual project.

Station Bar Code Return Table


The station bar code return table is used to collect the bar codes of the sets of equipment installed
at a station.
After all sets of equipment at a station are installed, you need to record the bar codes of the
equipment in the station bar code return table. The station bar code return table shows the
mapping relationships between bar codes and station names. Therefore, it must be kept properly
for future identifying the station where an NE is located when the ID and name of the NE are
changed according to the customer planning.

Engineering Design Documents


The engineering design documents are important inputs for equipment commissioning.
Generally, the following contents are covered:
l

Network diagrams: describe the module types, number of add and drop wavelengths, NE
types and quantity, and NE IDs of each station, distance between adjacent stations, line
attenuation between stations, and network topology.

Amplifier configuration diagrams: describe the amplifier configuration and line attenuation
at each station.

Wavelength allocation diagrams: describe the wavelength numbers at each station, service
relationships between stations (add, drop, or pass-through), and wavelength protection
relationships.

Fiber connection diagrams: describe the internal and external fiber connection
relationships, and slots, optical interfaces on the chassis and ODF terminals at each station.

Product Manuals
The product manuals of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment cover the equipment functions, features,
and guides to the installation, commissioning, configuration, maintenance, and troubleshooting
of the equipment.
In the equipment deployment phase, you are recommended to read this manual, that is, OptiX
OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge Optical Transport Platform Commissioning and
Configuration Guide. The reference manuals are as follows:

3-2

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Product Description

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Quick Installation and
Commissioning Guide

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Feature Description
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Preparations

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge Optical Transport Platform Alarms and
Performance Events Reference

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Troubleshooting

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Parts Replacement

You can log in to the Web site http://support.huawei.com to download the product manuals of
the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. The path is Documentation > Optical Network > Optical
Network Product Line > WDM > OptiX OSN 1800.

3.2 Preparing Tools, Meters, and Materials


You are recommended to use the Web LCT for the commissioning and configuration of the
OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. The version of the commissioning tool must match the equipment
version.

Commissioning Tool
You can use either the T2000 or the Web LCT for the commissioning and configuration of the
OptiX OSN 1800 equipment.
Compared with the T2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the computer hardware and
can be started quickly. Therefore, the Web LCT is recommended at the commissioning and
configuration phases. The Web LCT, however, does not support query or configuration of
network-level functions. Therefore, the query and configuration of network-level functions must
be performed on the T2000.
You can log in to the Web site http://support.huawei.com to download the required version of
the T2000 and Web LCT. The path is Software Center > Version Software > Optical Network
Product Line > Optical Network Management System.
NOTE

The versions of the T2000 and Web LCT must match the version of the equipment. For the matching
product versions of this document, see About This Document.
NOTE

When you use the T2000 for the commissioning and configuration, you must be an NM user with "NE
operator" authority or higher.

Commissioning Meters
An optical power meter and an optical spectrum analyzer are mainly used for optical power
commissioning. The optical spectrum analyzer may be used only for commissioning of a network
that is configured with optical amplifier (OA) boards.
The optical power meter can be used for testing the total optical power of multiplexed signals
and optical power of the optical transponder unit (OTU) boards. The optical spectrum analyzer
can be used for testing the optical power, optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR), and center
wavelength of a single wavelength of the multiplexed signals.
You are required to test the optical power of a single wavelength of the multiplexed signals by
using the optical spectrum analyzer because the test result is more accurate and the impact of
the noise does not need to be considered. The meters must be calibrated before being used.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Preparations

Commissioning Materials
The following materials may be used for optical power commissioning: fiber jumpers (FC/PCFC/PC, LC/PC-LC/PC, and LC/PC-FC/PC; two for each type), FOAs (3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB,
and 15 dB), flanges, fiber cleaning tissues or fiber cleaning boxes, and compressed gas duster.

3-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Commissioning Optical Power

Commissioning Optical Power

About This Chapter


The optical power must be first commissioned in the deployment commissioning to ensure
normal communication between all NEs and normal optical power received by each board.
If the actual line attenuation is consistent with the design attenuation, the optical power is
supposed to be within the normal range after the hardware installation engineers install the FOAs
correctly according to the engineering design documents.
4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical Amplifiers
When commissioning a system without optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attention to the receive
optical power of OTU boards.
4.2 Commissioning a System with Optical Amplifiers
When commissioning the optical power of a system with optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attention
to the output optical power of OAs, the receive optical power of corresponding OTU boards,
and the input optical power of the DCM module.
4.3 Checking the Optical Power Commissioning Results
When optical power commissioning is complete, you need to check the optical power
commissioning results.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Commissioning Optical Power

4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical Amplifiers


When commissioning a system without optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attention to the receive
optical power of OTU boards.

General Requirements
The general requirements for commissioning the optical power of a system without OAs are as
follows:
l

The optical power after commissioning must be within the permitted range.

A certain optical power margin must be reserved to ensure that optical power fluctuation
in a certain range does not affect the existing services.

Requirements on OTU Optical Power


The output optical power of an OTU board must conform to the optical power specifications of
the OTU board. For details on the optical power specifications of the OTU board, see the
Hardware Description.
After commissioning, the receive optical power of the OTU board must satisfy the following
formula: Lower threshold of the receive optical power Receive optical power of the OTU
board Upper threshold of the receive optical power. It is recommended that the receive optical
power of an OTU board after commissioning is equal to the average value of the upper and lower
thresholds in practical application.
The optical power on the WDM side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas:
l

Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity + 3 dB

Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload point - 5 dB

The optical power on the client side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas:
l

Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity + 2 dB

Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload point - 2 dB

General Commissioning Methods


In general, commission a system without OAs along the signal flow, that is, from the upstream
direction to the downstream direction, according to the requirements on the OTU optical power.
Measure the receive and transmit optical power of an OTU board by using an optical power
meter, or query the receive and transmit optical power of the OTU board on the Web LCT or
T2000.

4-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Commissioning Optical Power

CAUTION
In the commissioning process, ensure that the input optical power of an OTU board (either the
WDM or client side) is lower than the optical power at the overload point to prevent the receiver
optical module from being damaged or prevent the existing services from being affected.
Exercise caution especially when an APD receiver optical module is used because the overload
point of such an optical module is only -9 dBm. Hence, connect a fiber loosely or do not connect
a fiber to the input optical interface on the OTU board before measuring the actual input optical
power.

Figure 4-1 Example of a system without OAs


A
O O
T T
U U
B
A

OTU

OTU

M
U
X

D
U
X

M
U
X

D
U
X

OTU

OTU

If the receive optical power on the WDM side of the OTU (recorded as P1) fails to meet the
optical power requirement, do as follows:
l

If P1 is higher than the upper threshold of the receive optical power, attach an appropriate
fixed optical attenuator to the receive optical interface (point B in Figure 4-1) on the WDM
side of the OTU board to ensure that P1 meets the optical power requirement.

If P1 is lower than the lower threshold of the receive optical power, substitute a fixed optical
attenuator with lower attenuation for the existing fixed optical attenuator or remove the
fixed optical attenuator attached to the receive optical interface (point B in Figure 4-1) on
the WDM side of the OTU board. If P1 still fails to meet the optical power requirement
after the fixed optical attenuator is removed, check whether the fiber attenuation on the line
is proper and whether the network design data is correct.

If the receive optical power on the client side of the OTU (recorded as P2) fails to meet the
optical power requirement, do as follows:
l

If P2 is higher than the upper threshold of the receive optical power, attach an appropriate
fixed optical attenuator to the receive optical interface (point A in Figure 4-1) on the client
side of the OTU board to ensure that P2 meets the optical power requirement.

If P2 is lower than the lower threshold of the receive optical power, substitute a fixed optical
attenuator with lower attenuation for the existing fixed optical attenuator or remove the
fixed optical attenuator attached to the receive optical interface (point A in Figure 4-1) on
the client side of the OTU board. If P2 still fails to meet the optical power requirement after
the fixed optical attenuator is removed, check whether the transmit optical power of the
upstream equipment is within the permitted range, whether the fiber attenuation on the line
is proper, and whether the network design data is correct.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Commissioning Optical Power

If the output optical power of the OTU board fails to meet the optical power requirement on
OTU boards, replace the corresponding optical module.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Optical power meter, Web LCT or T2000, fiber jumpers (two FC/PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-LC/PC,
and LC/PC-FC/PC fiber jumpers), several fixed optical attenuators (3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB,
and 15 dB), fiber adapters, fiber cleaning tissue or cassette cleaner, and compressed air cleaner.

4.2 Commissioning a System with Optical Amplifiers


When commissioning the optical power of a system with optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attention
to the output optical power of OAs, the receive optical power of corresponding OTU boards,
and the input optical power of the DCM module.

General Requirements
The general requirements for commissioning the optical power of a system with OAs are as
follows:
l

The optical power after commissioning must be within the permitted range.

A certain optical power margin must be reserved to ensure that optical power fluctuation
in a certain range does not affect the existing services.

The optical power after commissioning must meet the requirements on system expansion.

Requirements on OTU Optical Power


The output optical power of an OTU board must conform to the optical power specification of
the OTU board. For details on the specifications of the OTU board, see the Hardware
Description.
After commissioning, the receive optical power of the OTU board must satisfy the following
formula: Lower threshold of the receive optical power Receive optical power of the OTU
board Upper threshold of the receive optical power. It is recommended that the receive optical
power of an OTU board after commissioning is equal to the average value of the upper and lower
thresholds in practical application.
The optical power on the WDM side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas:
l

Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity + 3 dB

Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload point - 5 dB

The optical power on the client side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas:
l

Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity + 2 dB

Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload point - 2 dB

Requirements on OA Optical Power


The average output optical power of the wavelengths of an OA must be equal to the nominal
output optical power for a single wavelength. In this case, the following requirements must be
met:
4-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Commissioning Optical Power

The average output optical power of the wavelengths of an OA is measured by connecting


an optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical interface on the OA.

Nominal output optical power for a single wavelength = Maximum total optical power of
the OA - 10lgN (N represents the maximum number of wavelengths permitted by the
system). For example, the maximum total optical power of the OA is 17 dBm. If the system
is designed as a 40-channel system, the nominal output optical power for a single
wavelength is 1 dBm as calculated by using the preceding formula.

The output optical power of a single wavelength of the OA should be equal to or close to the
nominal output optical power for a single wavelength.

Requirements on DCM Optical Power


If a DCM module is configured in a system, the optical power of a single wavelength input to
the DCM module must be equal to or lower than -3 dBm.

General Commissioning Methods


In general, commission a system with OAs along the signal flow, that is, from the upstream
direction to the downstream direction, according to the requirements on the OA optical power,
OTU optical power, and DCM optical power.
The optical power of an OTU board is commissioned in the same way regardless of in a system
with OAs or a system without OAs. For the detailed methods of commissioning the optical power
of an OTU board, see 4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical Amplifiers.

CAUTION
In the commissioning process, ensure that the input optical power of an OTU board (either the
WDM or client side) is lower than the optical power at the overload point to prevent the receiver
optical module from being damaged or prevent the existing services from being affected.
Exercise caution especially when an APD receiver optical module is used because the overload
point of such an optical module is only -9 dBm. Hence, do not connect a fiber or connect a fiber
loosely to the input optical interface on the OTU board before measuring the actual input optical
power.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Commissioning Optical Power

Figure 4-2 Example of a system with OAs


A
O O
T T
U U
B G

A
A

OTU C
OTU C

M
U
X
1

OA2

D
U
X
1

M
U
X
2

OA3

D
U
X
2

OTU

OTU

OA1

Connect an optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical interface on an OA, and then measure
the output optical power of a single wavelength and the average output optical power of the
wavelengths of the OA. If the output optical power of a single wavelength of the OA fails to
meet the optical power requirement, adjust the optical attenuator at the WDM-side output optical
interface on the upstream OTU board or adjust the optical attenuator at the input optical interface
on the OA to ensure that the optical power of the OA meets the optical power requirements.
See Figure 4-2. In the case of OA1, do as follows:
l

If the average output optical power of wavelengths is higher than the nominal output optical
power for a single wavelength, increase the attenuation of the optical attenuator at the input
optical interface (point as D in Figure 4-2) on the OA to ensure that the average optical
power of wavelengths is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength.

If the average output optical power of wavelengths is lower than the nominal output optical
power for a single wavelength, decrease the attenuation of the optical attenuator at the input
optical interface (point as D in Figure 4-2) on the OA to ensure that the average optical
power of wavelengths is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength.

In the case of the output optical power of a specific wavelength, adjust the optical attenuator
at the output optical interface (point C in Figure 4-2) on the corresponding OTU board to
ensure that the output optical power of this wavelength from the OA is equal to or close to
the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength.

In the case of OA2, adjust the optical attenuator at point E in Figure 4-2 to ensure that the average
optical power of wavelengths is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single
wavelength. If the average output optical power of wavelengths cannot be equal to the nominal
output optical power for a single wavelength after the attenuation is adjusted to 0, remove the
optical attenuator. If the optical power requirement is still not met, check whether the network
design data is correct.
In the case of OA3, adjust the input optical power of the MUX2 board at the upstream station,
and then adjust the optical attenuator at point F in Figure 4-2 to ensure that the average output
optical power of wavelengths of the OA is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single
4-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Commissioning Optical Power

wavelength. The methods of commissioning the input optical power of the MUX2 board are as
follows:
1.

Measure the optical power of each pass-through wavelength at the input optical interface
on the MUX2 board and then calculate the average optical power of these pass-through
wavelengths. In the case of a multiplexed pass-through wavelength, measure the average
optical power by using an optical spectrum analyzer. In the case of a single pass-through
wavelength, measure the optical power of this pass-through wavelength directly by using
an optical power meter.

2.

Measure the optical power of a single add wavelength at the input optical interface on the
MUX2 board and identify the add wavelength with the lowest optical power.

3.

Do as follows to adjust the optical power of corresponding wavelengths:


l If the average optical power of the pass-through wavelengths is lower than the lowest
optical power of the add wavelengths, adjust the optical attenuator at point G in Figure
4-2 to ensure that the optical power of each add wavelength is equal to the average
optical of the pass-through wavelengths.
l If the average optical power of the pass-through wavelengths is higher than the lowest
optical power of the add wavelengths, install one optical attenuator on each pass-through
channel between the DUX1 and MUX2 boards to ensure that the average optical power
of the pass-through wavelengths is equal to the lowest optical power of the add
wavelengths. In addition, adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuators at the output
optical interfaces on other OTU boards used to add wavelengths. This is to ensure that
the optical power of each add wavelength is equal to the lowest optical power of the
add wavelengths as measured at the input optical interface on the MUX2 board.
TIP

If the OPU board is configured with SFP EVOA, the attenuation value can be adjusted on the NMS.

If a DCM module is configured in the system, measure the total input optical power of the DCM
module by using an optical power meter. Then, calculate and ensure that the actual input optical
power of a single wavelength is equal to or lower than -3 dBm.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Optical power meter, optical spectrum analyzer, Web LCT or T2000, fiber jumpers (two FC/
PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-LC/PC, and LC/PC-FC/PC fiber jumpers), several fixed optical attenuators
(3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB), fiber adapters, fiber cleaning tissue or cassette cleaner,
and compressed air cleaner.

4.3 Checking the Optical Power Commissioning Results


When optical power commissioning is complete, you need to check the optical power
commissioning results.

Prerequisite
The optical power commissioning must be complete.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

4 Commissioning Optical Power

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether communication of all stations on the network is normal. For the checking
methods, see 5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs. If communication of an NE is interrupted
or the NE is abnormal, check whether the fiber connection is correct onsite.
Step 2 Check whether alarms indicating excessively high or low optical power, or bit error threshold
crossing exist on the network. For the checking and handling methods, see 5.20 Viewing
Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms.
Step 3 Check whether before-FEC and after-FEC bit errors of the boards that support the FEC function
are normal. For the checking methods, see 5.19 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FEC.
Step 4 See the preceding procedure to check and ensure that all optical power values on the network
are normal, and then save the networkwide optical power data. For the operation methods, see
5.22 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power and Alarm Data.
----End

4-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Commissioning and Configuring the


Network

About This Chapter


You can commission and configure the network after the equipment at each station on the
network is powered on and the stations are interconnected with fibers.
5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs
You can search for and create NEs when the NEs are connected to the NMS computer and the
communication between NEs and the NMS is normal.
5.2 Creating Optical NEs
On the T2000 the WDM equipment is allocated to different optical NEs for management.
5.3 Changing the ID and Name of an NE
The ECC protocol uses an NE ID to uniquely identify an NE. When planning the network, you
must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing
collision is caused. In this case, certain NEs cannot be managed.
5.4 Changing the IP Address of an NE
In the case of a gateway NE, change the IP address of the NE according to the customer planning.
In the case of a non-gateway NE, you do not need to change its IP address.
5.5 Configuring Ethernet Extended ECC
When there is no OSC or ESC communication between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of
the NEs can be used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the OptiX OSN
1800 series NEs take the auto-extended ECC communication. When the number of NEs that use
the extended ECC communication exceeds nine, you must set the extended ECC communication
to specified mode.
5.6 Configuring IP over DCC
When the network planning adopts the IP over DCC mode for communication, you need to
configure the DCC channel and check whether the IP routes are correct in the commissioning
and configuration.
5.7 Configuring Board Parameters

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Different boards implement different functions, and therefore you need to configure different
parameters in the commissioning and configuration for deployment. Set parameters
appropriately for each board according to the actual network.
5.8 Creating Fibers
You are recommended to create fibers in graphic mode in the Main Topology or signal flow
view.
5.9 Configuring Cross-Connection Service
The LQG and LQM2 boards support configuration of cross-connections and the methods of
configuring cross-connections on the two boards are the same. By default, a cross-connection
created on the LQG and LQM2 boards is a direct cross-connection.
5.10 Configuring Services in Service Package Mode
The service package module enables you to configure services on an NE in a one-click manner.
This configuration method is easier and quicker. The OptiX OSN 1800 supports two types of
service packages: GE service package and GE/STM-1 integrated service package. The LQM,
LQM2, and LWX2 boards support the function of configuring services in service package mode.
5.11 Configuring SW SNCP Protection
SW SNCP protection can be implemented by using convergence OTU boards that support crossconnections. This type of OTU boards includes the LQM2 and LQG boards.
5.12 Configuring Port Protection
On the port protection user interface, you can configure intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line
protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection.
Configure protection of an appropriate type according to the network design.
5.13 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS Time
With the time synchronization function, the NE time is kept consistent with the NMS time. In
this way, the NMS is able to record the correct time when alarms and abnormal events are
reported by NEs.
5.14 Starting NE Performance Monitoring
Enabling the performance monitoring function is a precondition for querying the performance
events. If the current NE time is in the performance monitoring time range as set before, the NE
monitors its performance events automatically. If the performance monitoring time range is not
set or if the current NE time is not within the performance monitoring time range, the NE does
not monitor its performance events.
5.15 Searching and Creating WDM Trails
After configuring services on an NE, search for WDM trails on the NE so that you can manage
services based on WDM trails.
5.16 Checking Configurations in the Commissioning Process
Correct setting of each system parameter is the precondition for ensuring normal network
operation.
5.17 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board
By backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can ensure that the NE automatically
restores to the normal state in case a power failure occurs. When you back up an NE database
to an SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the flash memory of the SCC board. After
a power-off reset occurs on the NE, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration data
from the flash memory and applies the data to the boards on this NE.
5.18 Checking Optical Power of Boards
By checking the optical power of a board, you can ensure that the transmit and receive optical
power of the board is within the normal range. When commissioning the OptiX OSN 1800, you
5-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

can adjust the optical power of a board at the site by adding, replacing, or removing a fixed
optical attenuator (FOA) or adjusting a variable optical attenuator (VOA) before an optical
interface.
5.19 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FEC
The count of bit errors before and after FEC is a key specification for measuring the system
operation quality.
5.20 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms
Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exception
on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.
5.21 Testing Protection Switching
In the commissioning or configuration phase, you can run a manual switching command to check
whether protection switching can be performed normally.
5.22 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power and Alarm Data
After commissioning a network, you need to query and save the optical power and alarm data
of the entire network. This type of data can help you analyze and understand the operating status
of the network in future.
5.23 Backing Up NE Data to the NMS Server or Client
You can manually back up the data of one or more NEs of the same type to an NMS server or
client.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs


You can search for and create NEs when the NEs are connected to the NMS computer and the
communication between NEs and the NMS is normal.

Prerequisite
Communication between the NMS computer and NEs must be normal.
The IE proxy must be canceled.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Procedure
l

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

Connect the ETH1 or ETH2&OAM optical interface on the SCC board to the NMS
computer directly or through a local area network (LAN) by using a network cable.

2.

Change the IP address of the NMS computer to ensure that the IP addresses of the
NMS computer and the NEs are in the same network segment. The IP address of the
NMS computer must be different from the IP address used by an NE or a computer
on the current LAN.
Generally, set the IP address of the NMS computer to 129.9.0.N, in which N represents
an integer ranging from 1 to 255 and the subnet mask to 255.255.0.0. You do no need
to set the default gateway.

3.

Start the server and client of the Web LCT, and then log in to the Web LCT. The user
name and password for logging in to the Web LCT are admin and T2000 respectively.
NOTE

The Web LCT access of NEs is disabled by default. Therefore, you need to enable the Web
LCT access of NEs on the NMS. Do as follows: Navigate to the NE Explorer of the NE that
you want to configure on the T2000. Then choose Security > LCT Access Control in the
Function Tree and click Access Allowed. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.

4.

5-4

Select Domain. The default value is the network segment 129.9.255.255. Click NE
Search to display the Search NE dialog box. Then search out all NEs with normal
communication.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

5.

Select the NEs that you want to add, and then click Add NE. In the displayed dialog
box, click OK.

6.

Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or
right-click the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed,
enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields, and then click OK.

TIP

You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift.


If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to
multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line.
If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you
do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user
name and password for login last time.

7.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Select the NE that you have logged in and click NE Explorer in the lower right corner
or right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer. In the NE Explorer, configure the NE
and associated boards.

Operations on the T2000

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1.

Ensure that communication between the NMS computer and NEs is normal. Then start
and log in to the T2000 server and client. The user name and password for logging in
to the T2000 are admin and T2000 respectively.

2.

In the Main Menu, choose File > Search for NE.

3.

Select the search area and click Start in the lower right corner. The Search for NE
dialog box is displayed. Click OK to search out all NEs with normal communication.
You can also select Create device after search in the Search for NE dialog box to
complete creating the NEs synchronously.

4.

Select an NE that is not created from the Search for NE list. Click Create to display
the Create dialog box. Enter values in the NE User and Password fields. The default
user name is root and password is password. Click OK.
TIP

You can select multiple NEs that are not created and click Create to create multiple NEs at a
time.
TIP

Select an NE from the Search for NE list and click Change NE ID in the lower right corner
to query the bar code of the NE. Then you can change the NE ID and name according to the
station bar code return table and the customer's NE ID planning.

5.

On the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE with unconfigured NEs, for


example, an idle optical NE. In the displayed dialog box, double-click an unconfigured
NE in the left area to display the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box.

6.

Choose Upload and click Next. The OK dialog box is displayed.

7.

Click OK to start the upload. When the upload is complete, the Operation Result
dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

8.

On the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE, for example, an idle optical NE.
In the displayed dialog box, right-click the selected NE and choose NE Explorer. In
the NE Explorer, configure the NE and associated boards.

----End

5-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Reference Information
Cate
gory

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Oper
ation
s on
the
Web
LCT

Obtaining the IP
Address of an NE On
Site

If you fail to query the IP address of an NE on the


T2000 or Web LCT on site, see this section to obtain the
IP address of an NE.

Creating a Single NE

If you have obtained the ID of an NE, you can create the


NE manually.

Creating an NE User

The user names for logging in to an NE must be different.


You can create an NE user as required.

Switching a Login NE
User

You can switch a login NE user without logging out of


the T2000 or Web LCT.

Configuring NE Data

You can configure the NE data in upload or manual mode.

Checking the Software


Version of an NE

After the NE data is configured, you can see this section


to query the software version of an NE.

Using the
Commissioning Tool of
the Access WDM OTN
for Deployment On Site

If the T2000 or Web LCT is unavailable on site, you can


directly manage an NE by connecting the NE to the
commissioning tool of the access WDM OTN for
deployment.

NE Attributes

Describes the parameters associated with NE attributes.

NE User Attributes

Describes the parameters associated with NE user


attributes.

Para
meter
descr
iption

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.2 Creating Optical NEs


On the T2000 the WDM equipment is allocated to different optical NEs for management.

Prerequisite
The license file must support creating NEs of this type.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


You can create optical NEs only on the T2000.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Procedure
l

Operations on the T2000


1.

Right-click in the Main Topology and choose New > Device.

2.

In the Add Object dialog box, select the optical NE type.

3.

Click General Attributes and enter the basic attributes such as the optical NE name
according to the customer planning.

4.

Click Resource Division and select an NE or a board from the idle optical NEs, and
then click

TIP

To re-allocate the resources of an optical NE that has been created, right-click the optical NE
and choose Attribute. Click the Resource Division tab, select an NE or a board from the list
on the left, and then click

to allocate the NE or board to the optical NE.

5.

Click OK.

6.

In the Main Topology, click any place to create the NE icon.

----End

Reference Information
Cate
gory

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Oper
ation
s on
the
T200
0

Changing the Name of


an Optical NE

See this section to change the name of an optical NE


independently.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.3 Changing the ID and Name of an NE


The ECC protocol uses an NE ID to uniquely identify an NE. When planning the network, you
must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing
collision is caused. In this case, certain NEs cannot be managed.

Prerequisite
The NE communication must be normal.
5-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Precautions

CAUTION
NE ID conflict leads to unreachable of NEs. Therefore, the ID of an NE must be unique on the
network.

CAUTION
If an NE is configured with the inter-subrack wavelength protection, you need to delete the
protection before changing the NE ID and configure the protection again after changing the NE
ID.
NOTE

If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the NE varies
with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between the NE ID and IP
address is deleted automatically.
TIP

If an NE is unreachable after the NE ID is changed, you can change the name of the NE only after searching
for and logging in to the NE again. Therefore, you are recommended to change the NE name before
changing the NE ID.

Procedure
l

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the Function Tree in the NE Explorer, choose Report > Board Detail Information
Report. The Query dialog box is displayed to show the query progress. When the
query is complete, an operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

2.

Obtain the bar code of the chassis from the queried information about the SCC board.
The following figure shows the bar code of the chassis.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3.

Find the bar code of the chassis in the station bar code return table to determine the
position and name of the station where the login NE is located. Then determine the
ID and name of the NE according to the NE ID and name planning provided by the
customer.

4.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > NE Attribute. Enter Name of the NE
according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.

NOTE

You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols,
and numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :,
*, ?, ", <, and >.

5.

Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed, enter values
in the New ID and New Extended ID fields, and then click OK. A warning dialog
box is displayed, click Yes. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is
displayed, click Close to complete changing the NE ID. At this time, the NE is
unreachable.

6.

Navigate to NE List and delete the unreachable NE. Search for and create NEs again.
TIP

When you search for the NEs again, the NE IDs displayed on the interface are the NE IDs after
change. The NE names, however, change to the new NE names automatically only after you
create and log in to the NEs again.
NOTE

For details about searching for and creating NEs, see 5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs.

5-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the Main Menu, choose Report > Board Manufacture Information Report.
Select the SCC board that you want to query in the Function Tree, and then click
.

2.

Obtain the bar code of the chassis on the Board Manufacture Information Report
tab.

3.

Find the bar code of the chassis in the station bar code return table to determine the
position and name of the station where the queried NE is located. Then determine the
ID and name of the NE according to the NE ID and name planning provided by the
customer.

4.

In the NE Explorer, click

5.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > NE Attribute. Enter Name of the NE
according to the customer's planning, and then click Apply. A dialog box indicating
that the operation is successful is displayed. Click Close.

and select an NE.

NOTE

You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols,
and numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :,
*, ?, ", <, and >.

6.

Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed, enter values
in the New ID and New Extended ID fields, and then click OK. A warning dialog
box is displayed, click Yes. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is
displayed, click Close to complete changing the NE ID.

----End

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Reference Information
Cate
gory

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Oper
ation
s on
the
Web
LCT

Deleting NEs

You may need to delete an NE after the ID or IP address


of the NE is changed. In this case, see this section to delete
the NE.

Creating an NE User

The user names for logging in to an NE must be different.


You can create an NE user as required.

Switching a Login NE
User

You can switch a login NE user without logging out of


the T2000 or Web LCT.

Para
meter
descr
iption

NE Attributes

Describes the parameters associated with NE attributes.

NE User Attributes

Describes the parameters associated with NE user


attributes.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.4 Changing the IP Address of an NE


In the case of a gateway NE, change the IP address of the NE according to the customer planning.
In the case of a non-gateway NE, you do not need to change its IP address.

Prerequisite
The NE communication must be normal.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Precautions

CAUTION
If the IP address of the NE and that of the computer where the T2000 or Web LCT server is
located are in different network segments, the communication between the T2000 or Web LCT
and the NE is interrupted. In this case, you need to configure the IP address of the NE and that
of the computer where the T2000 or Web LCT server is located so that the two IP addresses are
in the same network segment to recover the communication. Due to the restriction of the SQL
database, after changing the IP address of the computer where the T2000 or Web LCT server is
located, you need to close the client and server of the T2000 or Web LCT. Then restart the
computer and the server and client of the T2000 or Web LCT.

5-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Procedure
l

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE List, select the NE whose IP address you want to change, and then click
NE Explorer.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Communication > Communication Parameters.

3.

Enter the IP address of the NE according to the planning, and then click Apply. The
Warning dialog box is displayed twice. In the dialog, click OK.

4.

If the IP address of the NE and the IP address of the Web LCT server are in the different
network segment after you change the IP address of the NE, the communication
between the Web LCT and the NE is abnormal. Navigate to NE List and delete the
NE whose IP address is changed and communication is abnormal. Search for and
create NEs again. For details about searching for and creating NEs, see 5.1 Searching
for and Creating NEs.
NOTE

If the IP address of the NE and the IP address of the Web LCT server are in the same network
segment after you change the IP address of the NE, the communication between the Web LCT
and the NE is normal.

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the NE Explorer, select and NE and choose Communication > Communication


Parameters in the Function Tree.

2.

Enter the IP address of the NE according to the planning, and then click Apply. In the
Warning dialog box is displayed twice. In the dialog box, click OK.
NOTE

You cannot log in to the NE after you change the IP address of the NE on the T2000. To log
in to the NE, delete the original NE and create the NE again.

----End

Reference Information
Cate
gory

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Oper
ation
s on
the
T200
0

Modifying Gateway
NE Parameters

In addition to the IP address, you need to modify other


parameters of a gateway NE according to the network
condition. In this case, see this section to modify the
parameters of a gateway NE.

Changing the Affiliated


Gateway NE of an NE

To adjust the DCN network structure, you may need to


change the affiliated gateway NEs of certain NEs.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5.5 Configuring Ethernet Extended ECC


When there is no OSC or ESC communication between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of
the NEs can be used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the OptiX OSN
1800 series NEs take the auto-extended ECC communication. When the number of NEs that use
the extended ECC communication exceeds nine, you must set the extended ECC communication
to specified mode.

Prerequisite
The communication between NEs must be normal.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Background Information
The extended ECC communication has the following two modes:
l

Automatic mode: Extended ECC connections are established automatically. This mode is
convenient but extra connections are established. Therefore, the resource utilization ratio
is low and this mode is recommended to be used when the number of NEs is smaller than
nine.

Specified mode: Extended ECC connections are established according to the specified
server and client. In this mode, the connections are reliable and the bandwidth utilization
ratio is high. In normal cases, use the specified mode to establish extended ECC
connections. An NE cannot operate in both modes at the same time to establish extended
ECC communication with another NE.

In the case of Ethernet extended ECC, a server NE can be connected to a maximum of eight
client NEs and a client NE can serve as the server NE of another extended ECC group. Generally,
set an NE that is not configured with the supervisory channel (ESC or OSC) as a client NE and
an NE that is configured with the supervisory channel (ESC or OSC) as a server NE.
You can set the ECC extended mode on site or remotely. When setting the ECC extended mode
remotely, you need to set client NEs first and then server NEs under the condition that
communication between NEs and the NMS is normal.
When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, set an NE without the supervisory channel (ESC
or OSC) first and then an NE with the supervisory channel (ESC or OSC). In the case of an NE
without the supervisory channel, the NE is unreachable and communication between the NMS
and the NE fails after the ECC extended mode is set remotely. The communication is restored
automatically after an NE with the supervisory channel at the same station as the NE without
the supervisory channel is set.
For example, a station has ten NEs. The supervisory channel (ESC or OSC) is configured on
NE A. Figure 5-1 shows the network topology. Table 5-1 provides the IP addresses of the NEs
and the ECC setting plan.
NE A is the server NE. NE I is a client NE of NE A and the server NE of NE J.
5-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Figure 5-1 NE connections at a station

DCN

NOTE

NEs at the station are cascaded by network cables.

Table 5-1 ECC setting plan


NE
Name

NE IP Address

Configuration on the
Server

Configuration on the
Client

IP Address

Port

Opposite IP
Address

Port

132.37.49.130

0.0.0.0

1601

132.37.49.131

132.37.49.130

1601

132.37.49.132

132.37.49.130

1601

132.37.49.133

132.37.49.130

1601

132.37.49.134

132.37.49.130

1601

132.37.49.135

132.37.49.130

1601

132.37.49.136

132.37.49.130

1601

132.37.49.137

132.37.49.130

1601

132.37.49.138

0.0.0.0

1602

132.37.49.130

1601

132.37.49.139

132.37.49.138

1602

When setting the extended ECC communication mode at the station remotely, observe the
following sequence:
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

J I client H, G, F, E, D, C, and B A server I server


During the configuration, the status of the communication between the NMS and NEs changes
frequently.
l

After the setting on NE J is complete, the communication between the NMS and NE J fails.

After the setting on NE I client is complete, the communication between the NMS and NE
I fails.

After the settings on NEs H, G, F, E, D, C, and B are complete, the communication between
the NMS and NEs H, G, F, E, D, C, and B fails.

After the setting on NE A server is complete, the communication between the NMS and
NEs B, C, D, E, F, G, H and I is restored automatically.

After the setting on NE I server is complete, the communication between the NMS and NE
J is restored automatically.

Precautions

CAUTION
When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, ensure that the configuration sequence is
correct. That is, modify the ECC extended mode of opposite non-gateway NEs first and then the
ECC extended mode of the gateway NE. Otherwise, the communication between the NMS and
the unreachable NE cannot restore automatically. In this case, onsite resetting is required.

CAUTION
Do not set the extended ECC mode for the communication between gateway NEs of subnets. In
addition, you are recommended not to set a gateway NE but an NE closest to the gateway NE
as a server NE.

CAUTION
To ensure normal communication, the ECC extended mode of the NEs that adopt the Ethernet
extended ECC communication must match. The match requirements are as follows:
l If you set the ECC extended mode to automatic mode for an NE, you need to set the ECC
extended mode also to automatic mode for the opposite NE.
l If you set the ECC extended mode to specified mode for an NE, you need to set the ECC
extended mode also to specified mode for the opposite NE. In addition, the two NEs must
be of the client-server relationship. That is, if an NE serves as the server, the opposite NE
must be the client.
NOTE

When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, you are recommended to work out the ECC setting plan
in advance to ensure that the settings are correct.

5-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Procedure
l

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE List, select an NE that is defined as a client NE in the ECC setting plan.
Right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Communication > ECC Management. Click


Refresh and check the current ECC mode of the NE.

3.

In the right function panel, set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode.

4.

In the Set Client area, enter the IP address and port number of the server NE in the
Opposite IP field and Port fields respectively.
NOTE

l The IP address of each NE must be unique and on the same subnet.


l A client NE can serve as the server NE for NEs at a lower level. In this case, the server and
client ports of the NE must be different. That is, the port number that is set in the Set
Client area is used for the communication between the NE and the server NE and must be
different from the port number set for the server of the NE.
l The port number is in the range of 1601 to 1699, for example, 1610.

5.

Click Apply in the Set Client area to complete the setting of the extended ECC on
the client NE.
NOTE

If the client NE is set remotely, the NE is unreachable and the communication between the
NMS and NE fails. After the ECC extended mode on the server NE of the client NE is set
correctly, the communication restores automatically.

6.

In the NE List, select a server NE that is defined in the ECC setting plan. Right-click
the NE and choose NE Explorer. Then choose Communication > ECC
Management.

7.

In the right function panel, set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode.

8.

In the Set Server area, enter the port number that is the same as the port of the client
NE in the Port field.
NOTE

l The port number is used by the local NE for communication with the client NE.
l The port number of the server NE must be the same as the port number of the client NE.

9.
l
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Click Apply in the Set Server area to complete the setting of the extended ECC on
the server NE.

Operations on the T2000


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

1.

In the status diagram of an optical NE, right-click a client NE that is defined in the
ECC setting plan and choose NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, choose
Communication > ECC Management.

2.

Set the client NE and server NE in turn according to the ECC plan. The procedure and
precautions for the operations on the T2000 are the same as those on the Web LCT.

----End

Reference Information
Cate
gory

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Oper
ation
s on
the
Web
LCT

Obtaining the IP
Address of an NE
Onsite

If you fail to query the IP address of an NE on the


T2000 or Web LCT on site, see this section to obtain the
IP address of an NE.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.6 Configuring IP over DCC


When the network planning adopts the IP over DCC mode for communication, you need to
configure the DCC channel and check whether the IP routes are correct in the commissioning
and configuration.

Prerequisite
The communication between NEs must be normal.
The ID and IP address of NEs must be set.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Procedure
l

5-18

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE List, select an NE on which the IP over DCC needs to be configured. Rightclick the NE and choose NE Explorer.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Communication > DCC Management.

3.

Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab and click Create. In the displayed dialog box,
set the Port, Channel Type, and Protocol Type fields.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Set the Port field to the port of a line or an external clock interface according to the
actual IP over DCC network planning.
Set the Channel Type field to the same as the channel type of the third-type
equipment. In the case of a network that is comprised of only the OptiX OSN 1800
equipment, set the field to the default value GCC0.
Set the Protocol Type field to TCP/IP.
4.

Click Apply to complete configuring the DCC channel of the NE.

5.

In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > IP Stack Protocol


Management from the Function Tree. Click the IP Route Management tab. Check
whether the IP routes and their parameters in the routing table are the same as planed.
In normal situation, a gateway NE must have the routes to the IP addresses of all the
non-gateway NEs that are managed by the gateway NE and the route to the Web LCT
or T2000 server.

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the status diagram of an optical NE, right-click an NE on which the IP over DCC
needs to be configured and choose NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, choose
Communication > DCC Management.

2.

Set the NEs in turn according to the IP over DCC planning. The procedure and
precautions for the operations on the T2000 are the same as those on the Web LCT.

----End

Reference Information
Cate
gory

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Oper
ation
s on
the
Web
LCT

Enabling the Proxy


ARP

You need to enable the proxy ARP function of the


gateway NE of an NE before configuring the IP static
route for the NE.

Configuring the IP
Static Route for an NE

In addition to the requirement that the NMS accesses NEs


on the entire network through the gateway NE, there is
the upper layer application requirement of accessing
remote NEs based on the IP network layer. To meet the
requirement, you must enable the proxy ARP function of
the gateway NE, and then configure a static route to the
NMS on each remote NE.

Querying the OSPF


Protocol Status

If certain IP routes are unavailable, contact Huawei


engineers to adjust the OSPF protocol parameters used
by the NEs. Ensure that the OSPF function is available to
all the NEs.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5.7 Configuring Board Parameters


Different boards implement different functions, and therefore you need to configure different
parameters in the commissioning and configuration for deployment. Set parameters
appropriately for each board according to the actual network.
The section describes only the parameter values that you need to configure in the commissioning
and configuration for deployment. For the specific functions and working principles of the
boards, see the Hardware Description.
5.7.1 Configuring the LDGF Board
The LDGF is used to multiplex two channels of GE service signals (GE optical signal or GE
electrical signal) and two channels of FE electrical signals into a channel of OTU1 signals.
5.7.2 Configuring the LDGF2 Board
The LDGF2 board multiplexes two channels of 2 x GE service signals into two channels of
OTU1 signals.
5.7.3 Configuring the LOE Board
The LOE board is applicable to three scenarios: convergence of eight EPON services,
convergence of eight GE services, and mixed transmission of EPON and GE services.
5.7.4 Configuring the LOEL Board
The LOEL board interconnects with the OLT equipment to access eight EPON services.
5.7.5 Configuring the LOEU Board
The LOEU board is applicable to the convergence of eight EPON or GE services.
5.7.6 Configuring the LQG Board
The LQG board multiplexes four GE services to an OTU 5G or FEC 5G service.
5.7.7 Configuring the LQM Board
The LQM board is applicable to two scenarios: convergence of four services at Any rate and
regeneration of one channel of OTU1 optical signals.
5.7.8 Configuring the LQM2 Board
When the LQM2 board works in 2LQM mode, it is applicable to the convergence of double four
services at Any rate or regeneration of two OTU1 services. When the LQM2 board works in
AP8 mode, it is applicable to the convergence of eight services at Any rate or regeneration of
one OTU1 service.
5.7.9 Configuring the LSPL or LSPU Board
The LSPL board must be used in pairs with the LSPU board. The LSPL board interconnects
with the OLT equipment and the LSPU board interconnects with the ONU equipment.
5.7.10 Configuring the LSPR Board
The LSPR board interconnects with the OLT equipment at the RX1/TX1 optical interfaces and
with the ONU equipment at the RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to achieve the distance extension
of one GPON service through the retiming, reshaping, and regeneration (3R) function in
transparent transmission.
5.7.11 Configuring the LSX Board
The LSX board is applicable to two scenarios: transparent transmission of one channel of 10G
bit/s optical signals and regeneration of one channel of OTU2 or OTU2v optical signals.
5.7.12 Configuring the LWX2 Board
5-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

The LWX2 board is applicable to two scenarios: transparent transmission of two services at Any
rate and regeneration of two OTU1 services.
5.7.13 Configuring the SCC Board
The SCC board provides the DCC channels for the interworking and intercommunication
between NEs.

5.7.1 Configuring the LDGF Board


The LDGF is used to multiplex two channels of GE service signals (GE optical signal or GE
electrical signal) and two channels of FE electrical signals into a channel of OTU1 signals.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Precautions
TIP

In the case of the LDGF board, you can connect a portable computer to the FE interface by using a network
cable when the FE interface is in Used state. Then issue the ping command for connecting to the opposite
client equipment to check whether a normal connection can be established on the channel.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-21

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Service Type

GE, GE(GFP-T)

l Usually, GE(GFP-T) is recommended. In this


mode, the transmission delay is small and all
control protocol packets are transparently
transmitted.

Default: GE(GFP-T)

l In other cases, set this parameter to GE


according to the service encapsulation mode.
l Service types of the two boards that are
interconnected with each other must be
consistent.
Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused
Default: Used

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that
is used.

Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Enabled for


client-side optical
interfaces, and
Disabled for WDMside optical
interfaces.

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

Laser Status

Open, Close

Default: 0s

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain
the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LDGF board, do not disable
the WDM-side lasers on the LDGF board. Otherwise, NEs
become unreachable when neither a standby channel is
available nor protection is configured.

FEC Working Enabled, Disabled


State
Default: Enabled

5-22

l Enabled is recommended.
l FEC Working State of the two interconnected
OTU boards must be consistent.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Optical
Interface
Loopback

Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a


network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or
Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a
process of removing a fault on a network. However,
it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test
is complete or the fault is removed.

Default: NonLoopback

When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set


to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting
is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling
Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.
SD Trigger
Condition

SM_BIP8_SD,
PM_BIP8_SD
Default: None

This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger


Flag is set to Enable.
all the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.

Max. Packet
Length

1518-9600

This parameter is valid only when Service Type is


set to GE. The default value is recommended.

AutoNegotiation
of GE

Enabled, Disabled

Default: 9600

Default: Disabled

The Auto Negotiation parameter is available only


when the Service Type parameter is set to GE.
l It is recommended to set this parameter to
Disabled.
l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto
negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiation
parameter must be consistent with the value of
the Auto Negotiation parameter of the
equipment of the customer.
l The Auto Negotiation parameter must be
consistent for the OTUs in the same protection
group.

Intelligent
Fiber Status

Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

When a link is faulty, and the fault state must be


transparently transmitted to the interconnected
client-side equipment, the IF function needs to be
enabled.
l This parameter is valid only when Service
Type of the optical port is set to GE.
l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function
of the board is enabled.

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to


GE.
l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any
other protection.
l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to
enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the
default value for this parameter.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.2 Configuring the LDGF2 Board


The LDGF2 board multiplexes two channels of 2 x GE service signals into two channels of
OTU1 signals.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

5-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Service Type

GE, GE(GFP-T)

l Usually, GE(GFP-T) is recommended. In this


mode, the transmission delay is small and all
control protocol packets are transparently
transmitted.

Default: GE(GFP-T)

l In other cases, set this parameter to GE


according to the service encapsulation mode.
l Service types of the two boards that are
interconnected with each other must be
consistent.
Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused
Default: Used

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that
is used.

Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Enabled for


client-side optical
interfaces, and
Disabled for WDMside optical
interfaces.

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

Laser Status

Open, Close

Default: 0s

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain
the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LDGF2 board, do not
disable the WDM-side lasers on the LDGF2 board.
Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a
standby channel is available nor protection is configured.

FEC Working Enabled, Disabled


State
Default: Enabled

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

l Enabled is recommended.
l FEC Working State of the two interconnected
OTU boards must be consistent.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Field

Value

Description

Optical
Interface
Loopback

Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a


network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or
Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a
process of removing a fault on a network. However,
it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test
is complete or the fault is removed.

Default: NonLoopback

When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set


to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting
is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling
Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.
SD Trigger
Condition

SM_BIP8_SD,
PM_BIP8_SD
Default: None

This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger


Flag is set to Enable.
all the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.

Max. Packet
Length

1518-9600

This parameter is valid only when Service Type is


set to GE. The default value is recommended.

AutoNegotiation
of GE

Enabled, Disabled

Default: 9600

Default: Disabled

The Auto Negotiation parameter is available only


when the Service Type parameter is set to GE.
l It is recommended to set this parameter to
Disabled.
l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto
negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiation
parameter must be consistent with the value of
the Auto Negotiation parameter of the
equipment of the customer.
l The Auto Negotiation parameter must be
consistent for the OTUs in the same protection
group.

Intelligent
Fiber Status

Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

When a link is faulty, and the fault state must be


transparently transmitted to the interconnected
client-side equipment, the IF function needs to be
enabled.
l This parameter is valid only when Service
Type of the optical port is set to GE.
l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function
of the board is enabled.

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to


GE.
l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any
other protection.
l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to
enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the
default value for this parameter.

5-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.3 Configuring the LOE Board


The LOE board is applicable to three scenarios: convergence of eight EPON services,
convergence of eight GE services, and mixed transmission of EPON and GE services.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-27

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Service Type

None, GE(GFP-T),
EPON_OLT,
EPON_ONU

In case of EPON services:

Default: GE(GFP-T)

l When the board is configured with an OLT


optical module, set this parameter to
EPON_ONU.
l When the board is configured with an ONU
optical module, set this parameter to
EPON_OLT.
NOTE
When the service type changes between EPON_ONU and
EPON_OLT, the service type of a channel carrying
EPON services must be set to GE(GFP-T) or NONE first.
For example, when the board receives four EPON
services, the service type must be changed from
EPON_ONU to EPON_OLT. In this case, you must set
the service types of the four channels to GE(GFP-T) or
None before you change the service type to
EPON_OLT.

If no services are received at the board, you can set


the service type to None. In this case, the board does
not report electrical-layer alarms on the channel.
Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused
Default: Used

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that
is used.

5-28

Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Enabled for


client-side optical
interfaces, and
Disabled for WDMside optical
interfaces.

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

Default: 0s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Open, Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain


the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LOE board, do not disable
the WDM-side lasers on the LOE board. Otherwise, NEs
become unreachable when neither a standby channel is
available nor protection is configured.

FEC Working Enabled, Disabled


State
Default: Enabled

l Enabled is recommended.

Optical
Interface
Loopback

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a


network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or
Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a
process of removing a fault on a network. However,
it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test
is complete or the fault is removed.

Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: NonLoopback

l FEC Working State of the two interconnected


OTU boards must be consistent.

When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set


to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting
is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling
Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.
NOTE
The parameter can be set to Inloop or Outloop only when
GE Service is accessed.

SD Trigger
Condition

SM_BIP8_SD,
PM_BIP8_SD
Default: None

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger


Flag is set to Enable.
all the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.
This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-29

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.4 Configuring the LOEL Board


The LOEL board interconnects with the OLT equipment to access eight EPON services.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.

Default: Used

l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that


is used.
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

5-30

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Enabled for


client-side optical
interfaces, and
Disabled for WDMside optical
interfaces.

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

Laser Status

Open, Close

Default: 0s

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain
the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LOEL board, do not disable
the WDM-side lasers on the LOEL board. Otherwise, NEs
become unreachable when neither a standby channel is
available nor protection is configured.

FEC Working Enabled, Disabled


State
Default: Enabled

l Enabled is recommended.

SD Trigger
Condition

This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger


Flag is set to Enable.
all the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.

SM_BIP8_SD,
PM_BIP8_SD
Default: None

PRBS Test
Status

Enabled, Disabled
Default: /

l FEC Working State of the two interconnected


OTU boards must be consistent.

l Retain the default value when a network works


normally.
l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary
board if you need to perform a RPBS test during
deployment commissioning. Set this parameter
to Disabled after the test is complete.

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-31

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.5 Configuring the LOEU Board


The LOEU board is applicable to the convergence of eight EPON or GE services.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Service Type

EPON, GE(GFP_T)

Select a proper value according to the received


services.

Default: GE(GFP_T)
Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused
Default: Used

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that
is used.

5-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Enabled for


client-side optical
interfaces, and
Disabled for WDMside optical
interfaces.

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

Laser Status

Open, Close

Default: 0s

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain
the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LOEU board, do not disable
the WDM-side lasers on the LOEU board. Otherwise, NEs
become unreachable when neither a standby channel is
available nor protection is configured.

FEC Working Enabled, Disabled


State
Default: Enabled

l Enabled is recommended.

SD Trigger
Condition

This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger


Flag is set to Enable.
all the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.

SM_BIP8_SD,
PM_BIP8_SD
Default: None

PRBS Test
Status

Enabled, Disabled
Default: /

l FEC Working State of the two interconnected


OTU boards must be consistent.

l Retain the default value when a network works


normally.
l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary
board if you need to perform a RPBS test during
deployment commissioning. Set this parameter
to Disabled after the test is complete.

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: -

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-33

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.6 Configuring the LQG Board


The LQG board multiplexes four GE services to an OTU 5G or FEC 5G service.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

5-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Service Type

GE, GE(GFP-T)

l Set this parameter to a proper value according to


the service type of the interconnected board.
If Service Type needs to be changed from GE
to GE(GFP-T), set Port Mapping to
Encapsulated to OTU5G before you change
Service Type to GE(GFP-T). In case of GE
(GFP-T) services, Port Mapping must be set to
Encapsulated to OTU5G.

Default: GE

NOTE
After you configure a cross-connection for the board, if
the service type that you select when configuring the
cross-connection is different from the value you set for the
Service Type field, setting the Service Type field fails.
In this case, you need to delete the cross-connection and
set the Service Type field again.

Port Mapping

Channel Use
Status

Encapsulated to
FEC5G,
Encapsulated to
OTU5G

The default value is recommended. Different


service types are supported in the two mapping
modes.

Default:
Encapsulated to
FEC5G

l Encapsulated to OTU5G: GE and GE(GFP-T)


are supported.

Used, Unused

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.

Default: Used

l Encapsulated to FEC5G: GE is supported.

NOTE
Port Mapping of the two boards that are interconnected
with each other must be consistent and Service Type of
their WDM-side optical interfaces must be consistent.

l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that


is used.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Enabled for


client-side optical
interfaces, and
Disabled for WDMside optical
interfaces.

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

Default: 0s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-35

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Open, Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain


the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LQG board, do not disable
the WDM-side lasers on the LQG board. Otherwise, NEs
become unreachable when neither a standby channel is
available nor protection is configured.

FEC Working Enabled, Disabled


State
Default: Enabled

l Enabled is recommended.

Optical
Interface
Loopback

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a


network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or
Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a
process of removing a fault on a network. However,
it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test
is complete or the fault is removed.

Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: NonLoopback

l FEC Working State of the two interconnected


OTU boards must be consistent.

When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set


to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting
is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling
Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.
Max. Packet
Length

1518-9600

AutoNegotiation
of GE

Enabled, Disabled

Default: 9600

Default: Disabled

This paramter is valid only when Service Type is


set to GE. The default value is recommended.
The Auto Negotiation parameter is available only
when the Service Type parameter is set to GE.
l It is recommended to set this parameter to
Disabled.
l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto
negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiation
parameter must be consistent with the value of
the Auto Negotiation parameter of the
equipment of the customer.
l The Auto Negotiation parameter must be
consistent for the OTUs in the same protection
group.

5-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Intelligent
Fiber Status

Enabled, Disabled

When a link is faulty, and the fault state must be


transparently transmitted to the interconnected
client-side equipment, the IF function needs to be
enabled.

Default: Enabled

l This parameter is valid only when Service


Type of the optical port is set to GE.
l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function
of the board is enabled.
SD Trigger
Condition

SM_BIP8_SD,
PM_BIP8_SD,
B1_SD
Default: None

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger


Flag is set to Enable.
all the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.
This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to
GE.
l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any
other protection.
l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to
enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the
default value for this parameter.

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.7 Configuring the LQM Board


The LQM board is applicable to two scenarios: convergence of four services at Any rate and
regeneration of one channel of OTU1 optical signals.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-37

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Background Information
The service processing chip of the LQM board provides 16 timeslots for receiving services.
Different types of services require different number of timeslots. The total number of timeslots
for the services received at the LQM board must be smaller than the maximum number of
timeslots that the service processing chip can provide. In addition, the total number of timeslots
for the services configured at the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces
must be not greater than 16.
Table 5-2 lists the number of timeslots required by common services.
Table 5-2 Number of timeslots required by common services

5-38

Service Type

Number of
Timeslots
Required

Service Type

Number of
Timeslots
Required

GE/GE(GFP_T)

FICON

STM-1

FICON EXPRESS

12

STM-4

ESCON

STM-16

16

DVB-ASI

FC200

12

HDTV

12

FC100

HDTV14835

12

FE

OTU1

16

FC100_SLICE

FICON_SLICE

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Service Type

Number of
Timeslots
Required

Service Type

Number of
Timeslots
Required

FC200_SLICE

16

GE_SLICE

12

FICON_EXPRESS_
SLICE

16

In case of GE services, the committed information rate can be configured to change the number
of timeslots required. Table 5-3 lists the number of timeslots required by GE services at different
bandwidths.
Table 5-3 Number of timeslots required by GE services
Bandwidth (Mbit/
s)

Number of
Timeslots
Required

Bandwidth (Mbit/
s)

Number of
Timeslots
Required

931-1000

311-465

776-930

156-310

621-775

1-155

466-620

The LQM board supports slice services, such as GE_SLICE, FC100_SLICE, FC200_SLICE,
FICON_SLICE, and FICON_EXPRESS_SLICE. Compared with common services, slice
services feature better performance in transparent transmission of clock but require more
timeslots. In practical application, select a proper service type according to the actual conditions.
For example, when the LQM board is used to receive FC100 services, select FC100_SLICE if
better performance in transparent transmission of clock is required and timeslots are sufficient.
Otherwise, select FC100 so that more timeslots can be used to receive other types of services.

Precautions

CAUTION
If you delete a logical LQM board and configure it again on the NMS, the original configuration
of the board is deleted and the default configuration is restored.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-39

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Service Type

OTU-1, DVB-ASI,
HDTV, ESCON,
FC-100, FC-100
(slice), FC-200,
FC-200 (slice), FE,
FICON, FICON
express, FICON
express (slice),
FICON (slice), GE,
GE(GFP-T),
GE_SLICE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16,
None

The requirement on the number of timeslots for


service configuration is as follows: The total
number of timeslots for the services configured at
the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4
interfaces must be not greater than 16.

Default: OTU-1 (in


the case of the TX1/
RX1 interface) or
None (in the case of
the other interfaces)
Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused
Default: Used

Rate requirements for service configuration are as


follows:
l When the LQM board is used for converging
four services at Any rate, set Service Type
according to the types of the actually received
services. The TX1/RX1 optical interface support
service rates in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.5
Gbit/s and the other client-side optical interfaces
support service rates in the range of 125 Mbit/s
to 1.25 Gbit/s.
l When the LQM board is used for regenerating
OTU1 signals, set Service Type to OTU1 for the
TX1/RX1 optical interface.
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel
that is not used.
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that
is used.
For example, when the LQM board is used for
regenerating OTU1 signals, set Channel Use
Status to Unusedfor the TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3,
TX4/RX4, and IN2/OUT2 interfaces and to Used
for the TX1/RX1 and IN1/OUT1 interfaces.

Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

5-40

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Disabled(in
the case of the TX1/
RX2 interface),
Enabled(in the case
of other client-side
optical interfaces), or
Disabled(in the case
of WDM-side optical
interfaces)

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

In practical application, set this parameter according


to the scenario where the board is used. For
example, when the LQM board is used for
regenerating OTU1 signals, set Automatic Laser
Shutdown to Disabledfor the TX1/RX1 interface
and retain the default value for the TX2/RX2, TX3/
RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces.

Default: 0s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Open, Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain


the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
In practical application, set this parameter according
to the scenario where the board is used. For
example, when the LQM board is used for
regenerating OTU1 signals, set Laser Status to
ONfor the TX1/RX1 and IN1/OUT1 interface and
toOFF for the TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, TX4/RX4, and
IN2/OUT2 optical interfaces.
CAUTION
If communication between NEs is achieved through only
ESC provided by the LQM board, the following situations
occur when neither a standby channel is available nor
protection is configured:
l When the LQM board is used for converging four
services at Any rate, the NE becomes unreachable
after the WDM-side lasers on the LQM board are
disabled.
l When the LQM board is used for regenerating OTU1
signals, the NE becomes unreachable after the lasers
at the TX1/RX1 and IN1/OUT1 interfaces on the
LQM board are disabled.

FEC Working Enabled, Disabled


State
Default: Enabled

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

l Enabled is recommended.
l FEC Working State of the two interconnected
OTU boards must be consistent.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-41

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Field

Value

Description

Guaranteed
Bandwidth
for ClientSide GE
Service (M)

1-1000

l Users determine the ensure bandwidth for GE


services based on the needs. This parameter
needs to be configured only for GE services.

Default: 1000

l The value of the Guaranteed Bandwidth for


Client-Side GE Service (M) parameter must be
greater than the actual service bandwidth of
users. Only in this case, no packet loss can be
ensured.
l Retain the default value when timeslots are
sufficient.
l When timeslots are insufficient, decrease the
committed information rate (CIR) of GE
services to decrease the number of required
timeslots. This is to ensure that the total number
of timeslots is within the required range. For
example, when the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/
RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces are used to
receive GE services, the CIR can be set to 620
Mbit/s. In this case, each GE service uses four
timeslots. Hence, the total number of timeslots
required by the services received at the TX1/
RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4
interfaces is not greater than 16.

Optical
Interface
Loopback

Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: NonLoopback

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a


network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or
Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a
process of removing a fault on a network. However,
it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test
is complete or the fault is removed.
When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set
to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting
is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling
Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

Max. Packet
Length

5-42

1518-9600
Default: 9600

This paramter is valid only when Service Type is


set to GE. The default value is recommended.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

AutoNegotiation
of GE

Enabled, Disabled

The Auto Negotiation parameter is available only


when the Service Type parameter is set to GE.

Default: Disabled

l It is recommended to set this parameter to


Disabled.
l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto
negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiation
parameter must be consistent with the value of
the Auto Negotiation parameter of the
equipment of the customer.
l The Auto Negotiation parameter must be
consistent for the OTUs in the same protection
group.

Intelligent
Fiber Status

Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

When a link is faulty, and the fault state must be


transparently transmitted to the interconnected
client-side equipment, the IF function needs to be
enabled.
l This parameter is valid only when Service
Type of the optical port is set to GE.
l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function
of the board is enabled.

SD Trigger
Condition

SM_BIP8_SD,
PM_BIP8_SD,
B1_SD
Default: None

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger


Flag is set to Enable.
all the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.
This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to
GE.
l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any
other protection.
l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to
enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the
default value for this parameter.

8B10B Code
Violation
Threshold

0 to 15
Default: 15

This parameter is valid only when the service type


at an optical interface is FC100, FC200, FICON,
ESCON, FICON EXPRESS, or DVB-ASI.
The default value is recommended.

PRBS Test
Status

Enabled, Disabled
Default: /

l Retain the default value when a network works


normally.
l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary
board if you need to perform a RPBS test during
deployment commissioning. Set this parameter
to Disabled after the test is complete.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-43

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.8 Configuring the LQM2 Board


When the LQM2 board works in 2LQM mode, it is applicable to the convergence of double four
services at Any rate or regeneration of two OTU1 services. When the LQM2 board works in
AP8 mode, it is applicable to the convergence of eight services at Any rate or regeneration of
one OTU1 service.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.

5-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Background Information
The LQM2 board has two service processing chips, each of which provides 16 timeslots for
receiving services. Different types of services require different number of timeslots. The total
number of timeslots for the services received at the LQM2 board must be smaller than the
maximum number of timeslots that the service processing chip can provide.
l

In 2LQM mode, the total number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX1/RX1,
TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces must be not greater than 16 and the total
number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX5/RX5, TX6/RX6, TX7/RX7, and
TX8/RX8 interfaces must be not greater than 16.

In AP8 mode, the total number of timeslots for the services configured at all client-side
interfaces must be not greater than 16.

Table 5-4 lists the number of timeslots required by common services.


Table 5-4 Number of timeslots required by common services
Service Type

Number of
Timeslots
Required

Service Type

Number of
Timeslots
Required

GE/GE(GFP_T)

FICON

STM-1

FICON EXPRESS

12

STM-4

ESCON

STM-16

16

DVB-ASI

FC200

12

HDTV

12

FC100

HDTV14835

12

FE

OTU1

16

FC100_SLICE

FICON_SLICE

FC200_SLICE

16

GE_SLICE

12

FICON_EXPRESS_
SLICE

16

In case of GE services, the committed information rate can be configured to change the number
of timeslots required. Table 5-5 lists the number of timeslots required by GE services at different
bandwidths.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-45

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Table 5-5 Number of timeslots required by GE services


Bandwidth (Mbit/
s)

Number of
Timeslots
Required

Bandwidth (Mbit/
s)

Number of
Timeslots
Required

931-1000

311-465

776-930

156-310

621-775

1-155

466-620

The LQM2 board supports slice services, such as GE_SLICE, FC100_SLICE, FC200_SLICE,
FICON_SLICE, and FICON_EXPRESS_SLICE. Compared with common services, slice
services feature better performance in transparent transmission of clock but require more
timeslots. In practical application, select a proper service type according to the actual conditions.
For example, when the LQM2 board is used to receive FC100 services, select FC100_SLICE if
better performance in transparent transmission of clock is required and timeslots are sufficient.
Otherwise, select FC100 so that more timeslots can be used to receive other types of services.

Precautions

CAUTION
If you delete a logical LQM2 board and configure it again on the NMS, the original configuration
of the board is deleted and the default configuration is restored.

5-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Board Mode

AP8 Mode, 2LQM


Mode

l Set this parameter to 2LQM Mode when the


LQM2 board is used for converging double four
services at Any rate or regenerating two
channels of OTU1 signals. In this mode, two
channels of signals are sent on the WDM side in
a single-fed and single receiving manner.

Default: 2LQM Mode

l Set this parameter to AP8 Mode when the


LQM2 board is used for converging eight
services at Any rate or regenerating one channel
of OTU1 signals. In this mode, signals are sent
by optical interfaces on the WDM side in a dual
fed and selective receiving manner.
NOTE
Before changing the working mode of the LQM2 board,
ensure that no cross-connection or service is configured
on the board. If a cross-connection or service is configured
on the board, delete the cross-connection or service and
set Service Type to Nonebefore you change the working
mode of the board.
CAUTION
Switching between different working modes on a board
interrupts the existing services.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-47

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Field

Value

Description

Service Type

OTU-1, DVB-ASI,
HDTV, ESCON,
FC-100, FC-100
(slice), FC-200,
FC-200 (slice), FE,
FICON, FICON
express, FICON
express (slice),
FICON (slice), GE,
GE(GFP-T),
GE_SLICE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16,
None

Requirements on the number of timeslots for service


configuration are as follows:

Default: OTU-1 (in


the case of the TX1/
RX1 and TX5/RX5
interfaces) or None
(in the case of the
other client-side
optical interfaces)

l In 2LQM mode, the total number of timeslots for


the services configured at the TX1/RX1, TX2/
RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces must
be not greater than 16 and the total number of
timeslots for the services configured at the TX5/
RX5, TX6/RX6, TX7/RX7, and TX8/RX8
interfaces must be not greater than 16.
l In AP8 mode, the total number of timeslots for
the services configured at all client-side
interfaces must be not greater than 16.
Rate requirements for service configuration are as
follows:
l In the case of convergence of double four
services at Any rate (2LQM mode), the TX1/
RX1 and TX5/RX5 optical interfaces support
service rates in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.5
Gbit/s and the other client-side optical interfaces
support service rates in the range of 125 Mbit/s
to 1.25 Gbit/s.
l In the case of convergence of eight services at
Any rate (AP8 mode), the TX1/RX1 optical
interface supports service rates in the range of
125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and the other client-side
optical interfaces support service rates in the
range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s.
l In the case of regeneration of two OTU1 services
(2LQM mode), set Service Type to OTU1 for
the TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 optical interfaces.
l In the case of regeneration of one OTU1 service
(AP8 mode), set Service Type to OTU1 for the
TX1/RX1 optical interface.
NOTE
After you configure a cross-connection for the board,
setting the Service Type field fails if the service type
selected during cross-connection configuration is
different from the value you set for Service Type. In this
case, you need to delete the cross-connection and set the
Service Type field again.

5-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.

Default: Used

l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that


is used.
Examples are as follows:
l When the LQM2 board is used for converging
double four services at Any rate (2LQM mode)
or eight services at Any rate (AP8 mode), set
Channel Use Status to Used for all WDM-side
optical interfaces and set this parameter for all
client-side optical interfaces according to the
actual network design.
l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating
two OTU1 services (2LQM mode), set Channel
Use Status to Used for the TX1/RX1, IN1/
OUT1, TX5/RX5, and IN2/OUT2 optical
interfaces and to Unused for the other optical
interfaces.
l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating
one OTU1 service (AP8 mode), set Channel
Use Status to Used for the TX1/RX1, and IN1/
OUT1 optical interfaces and to Unused for the
other optical interfaces.
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Disabled (in


the case of TX1/RX1,
and TX5/RX5
interfaces), Enabled
(in the case of the
other client-side
optical interfaces), or
Disabled (in the case
of WDM-side optical
interfaces)

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.
In practical application, set this parameter according
to the scenario where the board is used. Examples
are as follows:
l When the LQM2 board is used for converging
double four services at Any rate (2LQM mode)
or eight services at Any rate (AP8 mode), set
Automatic Laser Shutdown to Disabled for all
WDM-side optical interfaces and to Enabled for
all client-side optical interfaces.
l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating
two OTU1 services (2LQM mode), set
Automatic Laser Shutdown to Disabled for
the TX1/RX1, IN1/OUT1, TX5/RX5, and IN2/
OUT2 optical interfaces. Retain the default
value for the other optical interfaces.
l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating
one OTU1 service (AP8 mode), set Automatic
Laser Shutdown to Disabled for the TX1/RX1,
and IN1/OUT1 optical interfaces. Retain the
default value for the other optical interfaces.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-49

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

5-50

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Field

Value

Description

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

Default: 0s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Open, Close

The default value is recommended. In practical


application, set this parameter according to the
scenario where the board is used. Examples are as
follows:

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l When the LQM2 board is used for converging


double four services at Any rate (2LQM mode)
or eight services at Any rate (AP8 mode), set
Laser Status to On for all WDM-side optical
interfaces. Automatic Laser Shutdown of
client-side optical interfaces is set to Enabled.
Hence, lasers on client-side optical interfaces is
enabled or disabled automatically according to
the signal receiving conditions at the WDM-side
optical interfaces on the local board and the
signal receiving conditions at the client-side
optical interfaces on the opposite board. That is,
you do not need to set this parameter manually.
l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating
two OTU1 services (2LQM mode), set Laser
Status to On for the TX1/RX1, IN1/OUT1,
TX5/RX5, and IN2/OUT2 optical interfaces and
to Off for the other optical interfaces.
l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating
one OTU1 service (AP8 mode), set Laser
Status to On for the TX1/RX1, and IN1/OUT1
optical interfaces and to Off for the other optical
interfaces.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LQM2 board, the following
situations occur when neither a standby channel is
available nor protection is configured:
l The NE becomes unreachable after the WDM-side
lasers on the LQM2 board are disabled when the
LQM2 board is used for converging double four
services at Any rate (2LQM mode) or eight services
at Any rate (AP8 mode).
l The NE becomes unreachable after the lasers at the
TX1/RX1, IN1/OUT1, TX5/RX5, and IN2/OUT2
optical interfaces on the LQM2 board are disabled
when the LQM2 board is used for regenerating two
OTU1 services (2LQM mode).
l The NE becomes unreachable after the lasers at the
TX1/RX1, and IN1/OUT1 optical interfaces on the
LQM2 board are disabled when the LQM2 board is
used for regenerating one OTU1 service (AP8 mode).

FEC Working Enabled, Disabled


State
Default: Enabled

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

l Enabled is recommended.
l FEC Working State of the two interconnected
OTU boards must be consistent.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-51

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Field

Value

Description

Guaranteed
Bandwidth
for ClientSide GE
Service (M)

1-1000

l Users determine the ensure bandwidth for GE


services based on the needs. This parameter
needs to be configured only for GE services.

Default: 1000

l The value of the Guaranteed Bandwidth for


Client-Side GE Service (M) parameter must be
greater than the actual service bandwidth of
users. Only in this case, no packet loss can be
ensured.
l Retain the default value when timeslots are
sufficient.
l When timeslots are insufficient, decrease the
committed information rate of GE services to
decrease the number of timeslots required. This
is to ensure that the total number of timeslots is
within the required range. For example, when
the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/
RX4 interfaces are used to receive GE services,
the CIR can be set to 620 Mbit/s. In this case,
each GE service uses four timeslots. Hence, the
total number of timeslots required by the
services received at the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2,
TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces is not
greater than 16.

Optical
Interface
Loopback

Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: NonLoopback

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a


network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or
Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a
process of removing a fault on a network. However,
it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test
is complete or the fault is removed.
When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set
to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting
is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling
Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

Max. Packet
Length

5-52

1518-9600
Default: 9600

This paramter is valid only when Service Type is


set to GE. The default value is recommended.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

AutoNegotiation
of GE

Enabled, Disabled

The Auto Negotiation parameter is available only


when the Service Type parameter is set to GE.

Default: Disabled

l It is recommended to set this parameter to


Disabled.
l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto
negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiation
parameter must be consistent with the value of
the Auto Negotiation parameter of the
equipment of the customer.
l The Auto Negotiation parameter must be
consistent for the OTUs in the same protection
group.

Intelligent
Fiber Status

Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

When a link is faulty, and the fault state must be


transparently transmitted to the interconnected
client-side equipment, the IF function needs to be
enabled.
l This parameter is valid only when Service
Type of the optical port is set to GE.
l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function
of the board is enabled.

SD Trigger
Condition

SM_BIP8_SD,
PM_BIP8_SD,
B1_SD
Default: None

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger


Flag is set to Enable.
all the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.
This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to
GE.
l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any
other protection.
l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to
enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the
default value for this parameter.

8B10B Code
Violation
Threshold

0 to 15
Default: 15

This parameter is valid only when the service type


at an optical interface is FC100, FC200, FICON,
ESCON, FICON EXPRESS, or DVB-ASI.
The default value is recommended.

PRBS Test
Status

Enabled, Disabled
Default: /

l Retain the default value when a network works


normally.
l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary
board if you need to perform a RPBS test during
deployment commissioning. Set this parameter
to Disabled after the test is complete.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-53

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.9 Configuring the LSPL or LSPU Board


The LSPL board must be used in pairs with the LSPU board. The LSPL board interconnects
with the OLT equipment and the LSPU board interconnects with the ONU equipment.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

5-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.

Default: Used

l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that


is used.
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Enabled for


client-side optical
interfaces, and
Disabled for WDMside optical
interfaces.

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

Laser Status

Open, Close

Default: 0s

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain
the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LSPL/LSPU board, do not
disable the WDM-side lasers on the LSPL/LSPU board.
Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a
standby channel is available nor protection is configured.

FEC Working Enabled, Disabled


State
Default: Enabled

l Enabled is recommended.

SD Trigger
Condition

This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger


Flag is set to Enable.
all the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.

SM_BIP8_SD,
PM_BIP8_SD
Default: None

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

l FEC Working State of the two interconnected


OTU boards must be consistent.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: -

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-55

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.10 Configuring the LSPR Board


The LSPR board interconnects with the OLT equipment at the RX1/TX1 optical interfaces and
with the ONU equipment at the RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to achieve the distance extension
of one GPON service through the retiming, reshaping, and regeneration (3R) function in
transparent transmission.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.

Default: Used

l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that


is used.
5-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Enabled for


client-side optical
interfaces, and
Disabled for WDMside optical
interfaces.

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

Laser Status

Open, Close

Default: 0s

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain
the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LSPR board, do not disable
the WDM-side lasers on the LSPR board. Otherwise, NEs
become unreachable when neither a standby channel is
available nor protection is configured.

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-57

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

5.7.11 Configuring the LSX Board


The LSX board is applicable to two scenarios: transparent transmission of one channel of 10G
bit/s optical signals and regeneration of one channel of OTU2 or OTU2v optical signals.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Service Type

10GE LAN, OTU-2,


OTU-2v, STM-64

Select a proper value according to the received


services.

Default: OTU-2
Port Mapping

Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1 G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping (10.7 G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1 G)

This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to


10GE LAN.
l When a board is used to transparently transmit
synchronous Ethernet services, this parameter
must be set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1
G).
l Select Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)
when there are OTU2v signals on the WDM
side.
l Select MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)
when there are OTU2 signals on the WDM side.
NOTE
l Port mapping of the two boards that are interconnected
with each other must be consistent.

5-58

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Field

Value

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Description

FEC Working Enabled, Disabled


State
Default: Enabled

l Enabled is recommended.

FEC Mode

This parameter is available only when you set FEC


Working State to Enabled.

FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC

l FEC Working State of the two interconnected


OTU boards must be consistent.

l The default value is recommended. To improve


the error correction capability, set this parameter
to AFEC.
l FEC Mode of the two boards that are
interconnected on the WDM side must be
consistent. Otherwise, services are interrupted.
Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused
Default: Used

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that
is used.

Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Enabled for


client-side optical
interfaces, and
Disabled for WDMside optical
interfaces.

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

In practical application, set this parameter according


to the scenario where the board is used. For
example, when the LSX board is used for
regenerating OTU2 or OTU2v signals, set
Automatic Laser Shutdown to Disabled for RX/
TX and IN/OUT optical interfaces.

Default: 0s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-59

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Open, Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain


the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
In practical application, set this parameter according
to the scenario where the board is used. For
example, when the LSX board is used for
regenerating OTU2 or OTU2v signals, set Laser
Status to On for RX/TX and IN/OUT optical
interfaces.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LSX board, the following
situations occur when neither a standby channel is
available nor protection is configured:
l When the LSX board is used for regenerating OTU2
or OTU2v signals, the NE becomes unreachable after
the lasers at the RX/TX and IN/OUT optical interfaces
on the LSX board are disabled.
l When the LSX board is used for transparently
transmitting the 10 Gbit/s optical signals, the NE
becomes unreachable after the lasers at the IN and
OUT optical interfaces on the LSX board are disabled.

NonIntrusive
Monitoring
Status

Enabled, Disabled

Optical
Interface
Loopback

Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

Default: Disabled

Default: NonLoopback

This parameter is valid when the board is used to


receive SDH services. The default value is
recommended.
Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a
network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or
Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a
process of removing a fault on a network. However,
it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test
is complete or the fault is removed.
When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set
to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting
is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling
Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

Max. Packet
Length

1518-9600

SD Trigger
Condition

SM_BIP8_SD,
PM_BIP8_SD,
B1_SD

Default: 9600

Default: None

5-60

This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to


10GE LAN and Port Mapping is set to MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). The default value
is recommended.
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger
Flag is set to Enable.
all the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to


10GE LAN and Port Mapping is set to MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

Default: Disabled

l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any
other protection.
l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to
enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the
default value for this parameter.
PRBS Test
Status

Enabled, Disabled
Default: /

l Retain the default value when a network works


normally.
l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary
board if you need to perform a RPBS test during
deployment commissioning. Set this parameter
to Disabled after the test is complete.

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.12 Configuring the LWX2 Board


The LWX2 board is applicable to two scenarios: transparent transmission of two services at Any
rate and regeneration of two OTU1 services.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-61

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Background Information
Table 5-6 describes the service rates of common service types.
Table 5-6 Service rates of common service types
Service Type
OTN

OTU1

2667.0

STM-16

2488.3

STM-4

622.2

SDH

STM-1

155.5

SAN

FC200

2125.0

FC100

1062.5

FC50

531.2

FC25

255.6

GE

1250.0

FE

125.0

Ethernet

5-62

Service Rate (Mbit/s)

ESCON

200.0

FICON

1062.0

FICON EXPRESS

2124.0

DVB-ASI

270.0

HDTV

1485.0 or 1483.5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Client Side
Service
Bearer Rate
(M)

Any rate in the range


of 42 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s rate excluding
the ranges of 400
Mbit/s to 500 Mbit/s,
800 Mbit/s to 1000
Mbit/s, and 1.6 Gbit/s
to 2.0 Gbit/s

Select a proper service type according to the actually


received services or enter a service rate directly. The
service rate must be accurate to 0.1 Mbit/s. For
example, when the board is used to receive STM-16
services, you need to enter 2488.3.

Default: 2667.0 Mbit/


s

Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused
Default: Used

NOTE
After you set Client Service Bearer Rate (M) for the
RX1/TX1 and the RX2/TX2 optical interfaces, the service
rates are automatically updated at the corresponding IN1/
OUT1 and IN3/OUT3 optical interfaces. That is, you do
not need to set Client Service Bearer Rate (M) for the
IN1/OUT1 and IN3/OUT3 optical interfaces. When
setting the service rates at the IN1/OUT1 and IN3/OUT3
optical interfaces, make sure that the service rates on the
client and WDM sides of the same channel are the same.
That is, the service rate at the RX1/TX1 optical interfaces
must be the same as that at the corresponding IN1/OUT1
optical interfaces; the service rate at the RX2/TX2 optical
interfaces must be the same as that at the corresponding
IN3/OUT3 optical interfaces.

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel


that is not used.
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that
is used.

Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

l The default value is recommended.

Default: Enabled for


client-side optical
interfaces, and
Disabled for WDMside optical
interfaces.

l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the


case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other
values are invalid.
In practical application, set this parameter according
to the scenario where the board is used. For
example, when the LWX2 board functions as a
regeneration board, set Automatic Laser
Shutdown to Disabled for the IN1/OUT1, IN3/
OUT3, RX1/TX1, and RX2/TX2 optical ports.
NOTE
When OTU1 services are received on the client side, the
ALS function is disabled on the LWX2 board. That is, all
lasers stay in enabled state.

Hold-Off
Time of
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

0s to 2s, with a step of


100 ms.

The default value is recommended.

Default: 0s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-63

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Open, Close

l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every


WDM-side optical interface.

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain


the default value because Automatic Laser
Shutdown is usually set to Enabled.
In practical application, set this parameter according
to the scenario where the board is used. Examples
are as follows:
l When the LWX2 board is used as a regeneration
board, set Laser Status to On for the IN1/
OUT1, IN3/OUT3, RX1/TX1, and RX2/TX2
optical ports.
l When the LWX2 board is used as a transparent
transmission board, set Laser Status to On for
the IN1/OUT1, and IN3/OUT3 optical ports.
Automatic Laser Shutdown of the RX1/TX1,
and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces is set to
Enabled. Hence, lasers on client-side optical
interfaces are enabled and disabled
automatically according to the signal receiving
conditions. That is, you do not need to set this
parameter manually.
CAUTION
If the LWX2 board is used as a regeneration board
between NEs and NEs communicates with each other
through only the ESC provided by the OTU regenerated
on the LWX2 board, do not disable the lasers on the
LWX2 board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when
neither a standby channel is available nor protection is
configured.

Optical
Interface
Loopback

Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: NonLoopback

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a


network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or
Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a
process of removing a fault on a network. However,
it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test
is complete or the fault is removed.
When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set
to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting
is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling
Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

PRBS Test
Status

Enabled, Disabled
Default: /

l Retain the default value when a network works


normally.
l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary
board if you need to perform a RPBS test during
deployment commissioning. Set this parameter
to Disabled after the test is complete.

5-64

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Field

Value

Description

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

5.7.13 Configuring the SCC Board


The SCC board provides the DCC channels for the interworking and intercommunication
between NEs.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the Function Tree.

2.

Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:
l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose
Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced
Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose
Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-65

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Parameter Settings
Field

Value

Description

Channel Use
Status

Used, Unused

l If the OSC channel is not configured or used in


the network planning, set the Channel Use
Status field to Unused for the TM1/RM1 and
TM2/RM2 optical interfaces.

Default: Used

l If the OSC channel is configured and used in the


network planning, set the Channel Use Status
field to Used for the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2
optical interfaces.
Open, Close

Laser Status

Default:
l WDM side: Open
l Client side: Close

l If the OSC channel is not configured or used in


the network planning, set the Laser Status field
to OFF for the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2
optical interfaces.
l If the OSC channel is configured and used in the
network planning, set the Laser Status field to
ON for the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2 optical
interfaces.
CAUTION
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the OSC, the NEs are unreachable after the lasers at
the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2 optical interfaces on the
SCC board are disabled.

Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)

The parameter format


is as follows: band
type/wavelength No./
optical interface
wavelength/
frequency, for
example, CWDM/
11/1471.00/208.170.

This parameter is for query only.

Default: Band Type

C, CWDM

This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Optical
Interface
Name

5.8 Creating Fibers


You are recommended to create fibers in graphic mode in the Main Topology or signal flow
view.
5-66

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Prerequisite
Optical NEs, NEs, and logical boards must be created.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


The T2000 must be used.

Precautions
NOTE

Fibers must be created properly according to the actual network. With fibers created properly, you can
understand the network architecture and locate faults intuitively during the operation and maintenance of
the network.
NOTE

You are recommended to create internal fibers of an NE in the signal flow view and fibers between NEs
in the Main Topology.

Procedure
l

Operations on the T2000


1.

Double-click an optical NE in the Main Topology. Then, click the Signal Flow
Diagram tab in the displayed window. In Signal Flow Diagram, right-click a blank
space and choose Create Fiber from the shortcut menu. The cursor is displayed as
"+".

2.

Select the source board and port and then click OK. The cursor is displayed as "+".

3.

Select the sink board and port and then click OK.
TIP

When an incorrect source/sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the operation and
exit the object selection.

4.

In the displayed Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber/cable
and then click OK to create an internal fiber of the NE. Create all other internal fibers
of the NE in the same way.

5.

In the Main Topology, click the shortcut icon


Then, click the source NE of the fiber/cable.

6.

In the displayed Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box, select the source board and
port and then click OK to return to the Main Topology. The cursor again is displayed
as "+".

7.

In the Main Topology, click the sink NE of the fiber/cable. In the displayed Select
Fiber/Cable Source dialog box, select the sink board and port, and then click OK.

8.

Enter the attributes of the fiber/cable in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box and then
click OK. The created fiber/cable between the source NE and the sink NE is displayed
in the Main Topology. Create fibers/cables between all NEs on the network in the
same way.

and the cursor is displayed as "+".

TIP

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.

----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-67

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Reference Information
Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tions
on the
T200
0

Creating Fibers in List


Mode

You can also create fibers in list mode on the T2000.


Creating fibers in list mode is not intuitive when
compared with creating fibers in graphic mode; however,
you can manage all fibers/cables through a same user
interface when creating fibers in list mode.

Configuring Services
by Creating WDM
Trails

You can configure services by creating WDM trails if the


following conditions are met: (1) NEs on the network are
not configured with services. (2) Fiber connections
between these NEs have been created on the T2000. (3)
All the NEs communicate with each other properly.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.9 Configuring Cross-Connection Service


The LQG and LQM2 boards support configuration of cross-connections and the methods of
configuring cross-connections on the two boards are the same. By default, a cross-connection
created on the LQG and LQM2 boards is a direct cross-connection.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the LQG or LQM2 board resides.
Service types must be set for WDM optical interfaces on the board.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Precautions

CAUTION
When configuring a cross-connection, ensure that the WDM-side path numbers at the transmit
and receive ends are consistent. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.

5-68

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

CAUTION
When the board that supports cross-connection carries electrical interface services, non-straightthrough cross-connections cannot configured for the electrical interface services on the board.
NOTE

For the cross-connect slots that the LQM2 and LQG boards support on the chassis, see the Hardware
Description.
TIP

When configuring cross-connections for a service, you need to configure one cross-connection on the NE
where this service is added and another cross-connection on the NE where this service is dropped. When
you need to configure cross-connections for multiple services on a network, select either of the following
methods to configure the cross-connections for all these services:
l On a per-NE basis: Configure cross-connections on one NE and then on another NE. In this manner,
configure cross-connections on all NEs on the network in turn.
l On a per-service basis: Configure cross-connections for one service and then for another service. In
this manner, configure cross-connections for all services in turn.

Procedure
l

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Electrical CrossConnection Service Management from the Function Tree.

2.

On the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New, and the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

3.

Set Level, Direction, Source Slot, Source Optical Port, Sink Slot, Sink Optical
Port, Source Optical Channel, and Sink Optical Channel according to the crossconnection planning. Then, click Apply.

4.

After configuring all cross-connections, click OK.

Operations on the T2000


1.

Select the NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

On the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New, and the Create
Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

3.

Set Level, Direction, Source Slot, Source Optical Port, Sink Slot, Sink Optical
Port, Source Optical Channel, Sink Optical Channel, and Activate Immediately
according to the cross-connection planning. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click OK. The procedure
and precautions for the operations on the T2000 are the same as those on the Web
LCT.
Activate Immediately is generally set to Active.

----End

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-69

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Reference Information
Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tion
on the
Web
LCT

Delete a crossconnection

See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.

Confi
gurati
on
exam
ples
by
using
the
Web
LCT

Configure transparent
transmission of GE
services

The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe


how to configure cross-connections for a GE service.

Configure transparent
transmission of SAN
services

The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe


how to configure cross-connections for a SAN service.

Configure transparent
transmission of OTN
services

The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe


how to configure cross-connections for an OTN service.

Configure transparent
transmission of SDH
services

The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe


how to configure cross-connections for an SDH service.

WDM crossconnection
configuration

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for


configuring a WDM cross-connection.

Para
meter
descr
iption

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.10 Configuring Services in Service Package Mode


The service package module enables you to configure services on an NE in a one-click manner.
This configuration method is easier and quicker. The OptiX OSN 1800 supports two types of
service packages: GE service package and GE/STM-1 integrated service package. The LQM,
LQM2, and LWX2 boards support the function of configuring services in service package mode.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to the NE where the LQM, LQM2, or LWX2 board resides.
5-70

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Background Information
You can select the required service package during the deployment. Then, you can run the
commands in the service package to configure services and query information the service
package.
You can run a command to manually apply a service package to an NE. In this manner, the
services on all the service boards on this NE are configured automatically. In the process of
applying a service package to an NE, the original configurations on the NE are deleted and the
configuration commands are then executed. A service package actually contains a series of
configuration commands. Some of these configuration commands are used for configuring crossconnections, and the other are used for configuring service types for optical interfaces. There is
an exception that a service rate other than service type is configured for an optical interface in
the case of the LWX2 board.
Table 5-7 lists the service configurations for the LQM board in service package mode.
Table 5-7 Service configurations for the LQM board in service package mode
Service
Package Type

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2)

5(TX3/RX3)

6(TX4/RX4)

GE bypass

GE

GE

Null

Null

GE/STM1
hybrid

GE

GE

STM-1

STM-1

Table 5-8 lists the service configurations for the LQM2 board in service package mode.
Table 5-8 Service configurations for the LQM2 board in service package mode
Service
Packag
e Type

3(TX1/
RX1)

4(TX2/
RX2)

5(TX3/
RX3)

6(TX4/
RX4)

7(TX5/
RX5)

8(TX6/
RX6)

9(TX7/
RX7)

10
(TX8/
RX8)

GE
bypass

GE

GE

Null

Null

Null

Null

Null

Null

GE/
STM1
hybrid

GE

GE

STM-1

STM-1

Null

Null

Null

Null

Table 5-9 lists the service configurations for the LWX2 board in service package mode.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-71

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Table 5-9 Service configurations for the LWX2 board in service package mode
Service Package Type

5(TX1/RX1)

6(TX2/RX2)

GE bypass

GE

GE

GE/STM1 hybrid

GE

GE

Precautions

CAUTION
In the case of the LQM2 board, after the configuration commands in a service package are
executed, a direct cross-connection between optical interface 3 and optical interface 4 is
configured automatically. In the case of the LWX2 and LQM boards, the configuration
commands in a service package cannot be used to create any cross-connection.

CAUTION
Precautions for configuring services in service package mode
l Service packages do not support expansion based on the existing services. If expansion is
required, you need to delete the existing services before configuring services in service
package mode.
l In the process of applying a service package to an NE, the configurations on all boards on
this NE are deleted and the service package is then implemented.
l If the NE is reset in the process of configuring scripts, you need to restart the service package
before you configure services.

CAUTION
In the case of the LQM2 board, take the following precautions before configuring services in
service package mode:
l After configuring services in service package mode, if one of optical interfaces 3 to 6 on the
LQM2 board needs to access another type of service, you need to reconfigure the service
type manually for this optical interface. Otherwise, the service is unavailable.
l If the current working mode of the LQM2 board is the 2LQM mode, the working mode of
the board automatically changes to AP8 after service types are configured for the board in
service package mode.

Procedure
l
5-72

Operations on the Web LCT


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

1.

Select the NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Service Package from
the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query to view the existing service package types.

3.

Select Package Type according to the service planning requirement and then click
Start. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
OK.

4.

Optional: To view the cross-connections created after the service package is


configured, select the NE in the NE Explorer and then choose Configuration >
Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree; to view
the attributes of an optical interface on the board, select the board in the NE Explorer
and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

Operations on the T2000


1.

Select the NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Service Package from
the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query to view the existing service package types.

3.

Select Package Type according to the service planning requirement and then click
Start. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
OK.
The precautions for the operations on the T2000 are the same as those on the Web
LCT.

4.

After configuring the service package, upload the NE data. For details about uploading
the NE data, see B.13.2 Uploading the NE Data.

5.

Optional: To view the cross-connections created after the service package is


configured, select the NE in the NE Explorer and then choose Configuration > WDM
Service Management from the Function Tree; to view the attributes of an optical
interface on the board, select the board in the NE Explorer and then choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

----End

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-73

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Reference Information
Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tion
on the
Web
LCT

Deleting CrossConnections

See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.

Confi
gurati
on
exam
ples
by
using
the
Web
LCT

Configuring
Transparent
Transmission of GE
Services in Service
Package Mode

The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe


how to configure transparent transmission of GE services
in service package mode.

Configuring Hybrid
Transmission of GE
and STM-1 Services in
Service Package Mode

The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe


how to configure hybrid transmission of GE and STM-1
services in service package mode.

Para
meter
descr
iption

WDM CrossConnection
Configuration
Parameters

See this section to learn how to set the parameters used


for configuring a WDM cross-connection.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.11 Configuring SW SNCP Protection


SW SNCP protection can be implemented by using convergence OTU boards that support crossconnections. This type of OTU boards includes the LQM2 and LQG boards.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to an NE.
The NE must be configured with boards that support SW SNCP protection.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000
5-74

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Precautions
NOTE

SW SNCP protection must be configured at both the sink and source. At the source, you need to configure
cross-connections to implement dual transmitting; at the sink, you need to configure cross-connections to
implement selective receiving.

Procedure
l

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE Explorer of the NE that functions as the source NE of SW SNCP protection,


select the NE and then choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection
Service Management from the Function Tree.

2.

On the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New, and the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box,
configure two cross-connections to implement dual transmitting. For details on how
to configure a cross-connection, see 5.9 Configuring Cross-Connection Service.
To implement dual transmitting on the source NE of SW SNCP protection, you need
to configure two cross-connections, which share the same source but have different
sinks. An example is as follows (1U chassis):
Source: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1 (this is a
unidirectional cross-connection)
Source: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1; sink: 4-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1 (this is a
unidirectional cross-connection)

3.

In the NE Explorer of the NE that functions as the sink NE of SW SNCP protection,


select the NE and then choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection
Service Management from the Function Tree. Click Create SNCP and the Create
SNCP dialog box is displayed.

4.

Set the SW SNCP protection parameters to complete the configuration of crossconnections at the sink NE. After the cross-connections are configured at the sink NE,
the selective receiving function of the sink NE is implemented.
Table 5-10 Requirements for setting key parameters of SW SNCP protection

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Parameter Name

SW SNCP Protection

Protection Type

SW SNCP

SNCP Type

Unavailable

Service Type

GE

OTN Level

Unavailable

Revertive Mode

Non-revertive

WTR Time (s)

Unavailable

Working Channel Delay Time (100ms)

Protection Channel Delay Time (100ms)

SD Trigger Flag

Disabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-75

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

NOTE

The values listed in Table 5-10 are recommended values. Set the parameters properly according
to engineering requirements in practical application.

Two cross-connections must be configured for Working Service and Protection


Service. The two cross-connections have different sources but share the same sink.
An example is as follows (1U chassis):
Source: 1-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1
Source: 4-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1
NOTE

When configuring the cross-connections, you need to configure only the source for Protection
Service but need to configure source and sink for Working Service.

5.
l

5-76

Click OK. Then, the protection group is created and displayed in the user interface.

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the NE Explorer of the NE that functions as the source of SW SNCP protection,


select the NE and then choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from
the Function Tree.

2.

On the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New, and the Create
Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, configure two
cross-connections to implement dual transmitting. For details on how to configure a
cross-connection, see 5.9 Configuring Cross-Connection Service.

3.

Click Create SNCP Service, and the Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed.
Set the SW SNCP protection parameters to complete the configuration of crossconnections at the sink NE. After the cross-connections are configured at the sink NE,
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

the selective receiving function of the sink NE is implemented. The precautions for
configuring cross-connections on the T2000 are the same as those when crossconnections are configured by using the Web LCT.
----End

Reference Information
Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tions
on the
Web
LCT

Delete a crossconnection

See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.

Convert a service with


SNCP protection into a
service with no
protection

A service with SNCP protection can be converted into a


service with no protection.

Para
meter
descr
iption

WDM crossconnection
configuration

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for


configuring a WDM cross-connection.

SNCP service control

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for


controlling services with SNCP protection.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.12 Configuring Port Protection


On the port protection user interface, you can configure intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line
protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection.
Configure protection of an appropriate type according to the network design.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to an NE.
The NE must be configured with boards that support port protection.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-77

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Background Information
Observe the differences between intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client-side
1+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection when configuring them. Table
5-11 lists the differences between these protection types.
Table 5-11 Differences between different port protection types
Protectio
n Type

Supporting Board

Configuration Precaution

Intraboard 1+1
protection

l OTU boards with the dual


fed and selective receiving
function. This type of OTU
boards includes LQG,
LWX2, LDGF, LQM,
LQM2 (AP8 mode),
LSPU, LSPL, and LDGF2.

l The protection must be configured on both


the sink and source NEs.

l OLP board and OTU


boards with the single fed
and single receiving
function. This type of OTU
boards includes the LOEU,
LOEL, LOE, LSX and
LQM2 (2LQM mode).

l The client-side service attributes of the


working and protection channels must be
the same. Otherwise, services are
unavailable.
l In the case of the intra-board 1+1 protection
by using an OTU with the dual fed and
selective receiving function, Channel Use
Status of a WDM-side optical interface
must be set to Used. Each of the WDM-side
optical interfaces on the OTU can be
configured as the working channel. When
the protection group is deleted, the service
is forcibly switched to optical interface 1
(IN1/OUT1) or optical interface 3 (IN3/
OUT3).
l The NE will be unreachable by the NMS
after the protection group is deleted if the
following conditions are met: (1)
Communication between NEs is
implemented by using an ESC channel. (2)
There is no standby channel. (3) Optical
interfaces IN1 and IN3 receive no light.

5-78

Optical
line
protection

OLP

Client-side
1+1
protection

SCS board and convergence


OTU board such as LQG,
LWX2, LDGF, LDGF2,
LQM, LQM2, LSPU, LSPL,
LOEU, LOEL, LOE, LSX.

l The protection must be configured on both


the sink and source NEs.
l The working and protection channels at the
receive end of the OLP board must have the
same receive optical power. The variance
threshold between primary and secondary
input power is 5 dB by default.
l The protection must be configured on both
the sink and source NEs.
l The working and protection OTU boards
must be of the same type.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Protectio
n Type

Supporting Board

Configuration Precaution

Intersubrack 1
+1 optical
channel
protection

OLP board and OTU board


such as LQG, LWX2, LDGF,
LDGF2, LQM, LQM2,
LOEU, LOE, LSX.

l In the case of inter-subrack wavelength


protection, the working OTU board and the
protection OTU board are installed in
different subracks. You are recommended
to install the OLP board in the chassis
where the working OTU board resides.
l The working and protection OTU boards
must be of the same type.
l The LOEU and LOE boards support intersubrack protection only in the scenario
where GE services are accessed.

For details about the preceding protection types, see the Feature Description.

Procedure
l

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE list, select the NE and then click the NE Explorer button.

2.

Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.

3.

In the Port Protection window, click New.

4.

Set parameters for the selected protection type. Click OK to display a dialog box.
Then, click OK to complete the protection configuration.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-79

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Table 5-12 Requirements for setting parameters of different protection types


Paramete
r Name

5-80

Optical
line
protectio
n

Intra-board 1+1
protection

Clientside 1+1
protectio
n

Intersubrack 1
+1 optical
channel
protectio
n

Impleme
nted by
Using
OTU
Boards
with the
Dual Fed
and
Selective
Receiving
Function

Impleme
nted by
Using
OLP
Boards
and OTU
Boards
with the
Single
Fed and
Single
Receiving
Function

Protection
type

Optical line
protection

Intra-board
1+1
protection

Intra-board
1+1
protection

Client-side
1+1
protection

Intersubrack 1
+1 optical
channel
protection

NE with
the
Working
Channel

The NE
where the
OLP board
resides. For
example,
NE7201.

The NE
where the
OTU board
resides. For
example,
NE7201.

The NE
where the
OLP board
resides. For
example,
NE7201.

The NE
where the
working
OTU board
resides. For
example,
NE7201.

The NE
where the
working
OTU board
resides. For
example,
NE7201.

Board with
Working
Channel

OLP board,
for
example,
4-OLP

OTU
board, for
example,
1-LQM2

OLP board,
for
example,
4-OLP

Working
OTU
board, for
example,
1-LWX2

Working
OTU
board, for
example,
4-LQM2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Paramete
r Name

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Optical
line
protectio
n

Intra-board 1+1
protection

Clientside 1+1
protectio
n

Intersubrack 1
+1 optical
channel
protectio
n

Impleme
nted by
Using
OTU
Boards
with the
Dual Fed
and
Selective
Receiving
Function

Impleme
nted by
Using
OLP
Boards
and OTU
Boards
with the
Single
Fed and
Single
Receiving
Function

Working
Channel

The
working
channel on
the OLP
board. For
example, 1
(RI1/TO1).

The
working
channel on
the OTU
board,
namely, a
WDM-side
optical
interface.
For
example, 1
(IN1/
OUT1).

The
working
channel on
the OLP
board. For
example, 1
(RI1/TO1).

A clientside optical
interface
on the
working
OTU
board. For
example, 1
(RX1/
TX1).

A WDMside optical
interface
on the
working
OTU
board. In
the case of
a
convergen
ce OTU
board, you
can select a
client-side
optical
interface as
the
protection
channel.
For
example, 3
(RX3/
TX3).

NE with
Protection
Channel

The NE
where the
OLP board
resides. For
example,
NE7201.

The NE
where the
OTU board
resides. For
example,
NE7201.

The NE
where the
OLP board
resides. For
example,
NE7201.

The NE
where the
protection
OTU board
resides. For
example,
NE7201.

The NE
where the
protection
OTU board
resides. For
example,
NE7176.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-81

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Paramete
r Name

5-82

Optical
line
protectio
n

Intra-board 1+1
protection

Clientside 1+1
protectio
n

Intersubrack 1
+1 optical
channel
protectio
n

Impleme
nted by
Using
OTU
Boards
with the
Dual Fed
and
Selective
Receiving
Function

Impleme
nted by
Using
OLP
Boards
and OTU
Boards
with the
Single
Fed and
Single
Receiving
Function

Board with
Protection
Channel

OLP board,
for
example,
4-OLP

OTU
board, for
example,
1-LQM2

OLP board,
for
example,
4-OLP

Protection
OTU
board, for
example,
3-LWX2

Protection
OTU
board, for
example,
4-LQM2

Protection
Channel

The
protection
channel on
the OLP
board. For
example, 2
(RI2/TO2).

The
protection
channel on
the OTU
board,
namely, a
WDM-side
optical
interface.
For
example, 2
(IN2/
OUT2).

The
protection
channel on
the OLP
board. For
example, 2
(RI2/TO2).

A clientside optical
interface
on the
protection
OTU
board. For
example, 1
(RX1/
TX1).

A WDMside optical
interface
on the
protection
OTU
board. In
the case of
a
convergen
ce OTU
board, you
can select a
client-side
optical
interface as
the
protection
channel.
For
example, 3
(RX3/
TX3).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Paramete
r Name

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Optical
line
protectio
n

Intra-board 1+1
protection

Clientside 1+1
protectio
n

Intersubrack 1
+1 optical
channel
protectio
n

Impleme
nted by
Using
OTU
Boards
with the
Dual Fed
and
Selective
Receiving
Function

Impleme
nted by
Using
OLP
Boards
and OTU
Boards
with the
Single
Fed and
Single
Receiving
Function

NE with
Control
Channel/
Monitoring
Channel

Unavailabl
e

Unavailabl
e

The NE
where the
OTU board
resides. For
example,
NE7201.

Unavailabl
e

The NE
where the
OLP board
resides.
This NE
generally
houses the
working
OTU
board. For
example,
NE7201.

Board with
Control
Channel/
Monitoring
Channel

Unavailabl
e

Unavailabl
e

OTU
board, for
example,
1-LQM2

Unavailabl
e

OLP board,
for
example,
1-OLP

Control
Channel/
Monitoring
Channel

Unavailabl
e

Unavailabl
e

A WDMside optical
interface
on the OTU
board. For
example, 1
(IN1/
OUT1).

Unavailabl
e

Optical
interface 1
(RI1/TO1)
on the OLP
board

Working
Channel
Delay
Time
(100ms)

Unavailabl
e

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-83

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Paramete
r Name

Optical
line
protectio
n

Intra-board 1+1
protection

Clientside 1+1
protectio
n

Intersubrack 1
+1 optical
channel
protectio
n

Impleme
nted by
Using
OTU
Boards
with the
Dual Fed
and
Selective
Receiving
Function

Impleme
nted by
Using
OLP
Boards
and OTU
Boards
with the
Single
Fed and
Single
Receiving
Function

Protection
Channel
Delay
Time
(100ms)

Unavailabl
e

Control
Channel/
Monitoring
Channel
Delay
Time
(100ms)

Unavailabl
e

Unavailabl
e

Unavailabl
e

Unavailabl
e

Revertive
Mode

Nonrevertive

Nonrevertive

Unavailabl
e

Nonrevertive

Nonrevertive

WTR Time
(s)

Unavailabl
e

Unavailabl
e

Unavailabl
e

Unavailabl
e

Unavailabl
e

SD Trigger
Flag

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

NOTE

The values listed in Table 5-12 are recommended values. Set the parameters properly according
to engineering requirements in practical application.
NOTE

In the case of the intra-board 1+1 protection implemented by using the OLP board and the OTU
board with single fed and single receiving function, the Revertive Mode field is unavailable.
In the case of other protection types, if you set the Revertive Mode field to Revertive, you
also need to set the WTR Time (s) field. The value of the WTR Time (s) field ranges from
300 to 720. The default value is 600.

5.

5-84

Optional: When configuring the intra-board 1+1 protection implemented by using


OTU boards with the dual fed and selective receiving function, add an optical interface
if an optical interface is idle but cannot be selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

(1) Click NE Panel. Right-click the board on which you need to add a port, and then
choose Path View from the shortcut menu.

(2) Right-click a blank space in the path view and then choose Add Port from the
shortcut menu.

(3) Select a number for the new port, for example, 2(IN2/OUT2). Retain the default
port type, for example, Line Side Color Optical Port. Then, click OK. At this
point, a new port is added.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-85

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

CAUTION
Do not delete a port or change the port type unless required.
l Services are interrupted after a port is deleted.
l If the type of services received at a port is inconsistent with the default service
type supported by the board, changing the port type results in a service
interruption.
l In the case of the LQM and LQM2 boards, after the port type is changed, the
service type on the port is changed into None.
The navigation path for deleting a port or changing the port type is as follows:
Click Slot Layout. Right-click the board, and then choose Path View from the
shortcut menu. Right-click the port and choose Delete Port or Modify Port
Type as required.
6.

Optional: Repeat steps 1 to 4 to complete the protection configuration.


TIP

After the protection is configured, select a protection group in the Port Protection window.
In the right lower corner, you can click Delete to delete the protection group or click Modify
to modify the parameters of the protection group.

CAUTION
Deleting a protection group can make an NE unreachable.
l

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the NE Explorer window, choose Configuration > Port Protection from the
Function Tree.

2.

In the Port Protection window, click New. Set parameters for the selected protection
type by referring to Table 5-12. The precautions for the operations on the T2000 are
the same as those on the Web LCT.

3.

Optional: When configuring a protection group, you need to add a port in the NE
Panel window if a port is idle but cannot be selected. In the NE Panel window, rightclick the board on which you need to add a port and then choose Path View. Rightclick a blank space in the path view and then choose Add Port from the shortcut menu.
After adding a port, return to the Port Protection window to proceed with the
protection configuration.

----End
5-86

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Reference Information
Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

Para
meter
descr
iption

Port protection

See this section to learn how to set the parameters used


for configuring port protection.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.13 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS Time


With the time synchronization function, the NE time is kept consistent with the NMS time. In
this way, the NMS is able to record the correct time when alarms and abnormal events are
reported by NEs.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to an NE.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Background Information
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the NMS, the generation time of such alarms
and events is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, the generation time of the alarms
recorded in the NMS is also incorrect, which may cause troubles in fault locating. The same case
happens to the generation time of abnormal events that are recorded in the NE security log. To
prevent the preceding problem, the NMS provides the function of synchronizing the NE time
with the NMS time to ensure that the NE time is correct.
With this function, all NEs can be synchronized with the NMS time manually or automatically.
In this manner, all the NEs use the NMS time as the standard time. The NMS server time refers
to the time of the computer system where the NMS server resides. This function features easy
operation and applies to a network with relatively low requirement for time accuracy.
Synchronizing NE time with the NMS time does not affect the existing services. Before
synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time, make sure that the time of the computer system
where the Web LCT/T2000 server resides is correct. If you need to change the computer system
time, first exit the Web LCT/T2000. Then, restart the Web LCT/T2000 after re-setting the
computer system time.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-87

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Procedure
l

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time


Synchronization from the Function Tree. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then
click Apply.

2.

Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. In this manner, the
NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

3.

Optional: Do as follows to set the function of automatically synchronizing the NE


time with the NMS time. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.

4.

Optional: Set Synchronization Starting Time and Synchronization Period


(days), and then click Apply.
NOTE

Synchronization Starting Time cannot be earlier than the current time.

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time


Synchronization from the Function Tree. The Operation Result dialog box is
displayed. Click Close.

2.

Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. A dialog box is
displayed. Click Yes. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. In
this manner, the NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

3.

Optional: Do as follows to set the function of automatically synchronizing the NE


time with the NMS time. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and the click Apply.

4.

Optional: Set Synchronization Starting Time and Synchronization Period


(days), and then click Apply.
NOTE

Synchronization Starting Time cannot be earlier than the current time.

----End

Reference Information

5-88

Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

Para
meter
descr
iption

Parameters for
Synchronizing NE
Time

See this section to learn how to set the parameters


associated with NE time synchronization.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.14 Starting NE Performance Monitoring


Enabling the performance monitoring function is a precondition for querying the performance
events. If the current NE time is in the performance monitoring time range as set before, the NE
monitors its performance events automatically. If the performance monitoring time range is not
set or if the current NE time is not within the performance monitoring time range, the NE does
not monitor its performance events.

Prerequisite
The NE time must be synchronized with the NMS time.
You must have logged in to an NE.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Precautions
NOTE

The start time for monitoring NE performance must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. If
you need to monitor the performance immediately, set the start time just a little later than the current time
of the NMS and NE. The end time must be later than the start time or you can keep the end time field blank.

Procedure
l

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Performance > NE Performance
Monitoring Time from the Function Tree. In Performance Monitor Time, select
the desired NE.
NOTE

An NE must be selected in this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the
task.

2.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

In the 15-Minute Performance Monitor field, select Enabled and click


behind
the From field to set the start time for monitoring the 15-minute performance of the
NE.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-89

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

TIP

The method of setting the time is as follows: In the hour, minute, or second time control, rightclick the time to increase it, or press Shift and right-click the time to decrease it.

3.

behind
In the 24-Minute Performance Monitor field, select Enabled and click
the From field to set the start time for monitoring the 24-minute performance of the
NE.

4.

Click Apply to apply the settings.

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Performance > NE Performance
Monitoring Time from the Function Tree.
TIP

You can also choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main
Menu, and then select the desired NE to display the user interface.

2.

In Performance Monitor Time, select the desired NE.


NOTE

An NE must be selected in this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the
task.

3.

In the 15-Minute Performance Monitor field, select Enabled. Then, in the From
field, enter the start time directly.

4.

In the 24-Minute Performance Monitor field, select Enabled. Then, in the From
field, enter the start time directly.

5.

Click Apply. Then, in the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

----End

5-90

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Reference Information
Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tions
on the
Web
LCT

Set performance
thresholds for a
specified board

When an NE detects that a certain performance value


exceeds the specified threshold, the NE reports a
corresponding performance event. See this section to
learn how to change the performance threshold of a
specified board.

Set performance
monitoring parameters
of a board

The Web LCT/T2000 can monitor the performance of all


boards on a network. The automatic reporting of detected
performance values, however, is disabled by default. You
can change the default setting as required.

Set performance
monitoring parameters
of an NE

Set the performance monitoring parameters of a specified


NE properly and then enable the NE performance
monitoring function. By doing so, you can obtain detailed
description of performance records during the operation
of the NE. This facilitates monitoring of the existing
services and the equipment status.

Reset the performance


register of a board

After a network test or fault recovery, you need to reset


the performance register of a board as required before the
board is put into operation. This is to start a new
performance monitoring period.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.15 Searching and Creating WDM Trails


After configuring services on an NE, search for WDM trails on the NE so that you can manage
services based on WDM trails.

Prerequisite
All fibers must be created properly.
All required services must be configured properly on the NE.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


The T2000 must be used.

Background Information
The OptiX OSN 1800 supports searching for the following WDM trails on the T2000:
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-91

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Client trail

ODUk trail

OTUk trail

OCh trail

OMS trail

OTS trail

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Of these WDM trails, you can manage OTS trails directly without searching for them, because
the OTS trail data is stored at the network layer when fibers are connected.

Precautions
NOTE

In the process of searching and creating WDM trails, discrete services may be generated. You need to
analyze and remove the discrete services to ensure that no discrete service exist on the network at last.

Procedure
l

Operations on the T2000


For detailed description of searching, creating, and managing WDM trails, see the online
help for the T2000.
1.

In the Main Menu, choose Trail > WDM Trail Search to display the WDM Trail
Search navigation.

2.

In the Advanced settings area, set various handling policies associated with trail
searching.

NOTE

In the mode of searching for WDM trails by subnet, it is recommended that the selected subnet
should be separate from the other portions of the network. That is, no fiber connection exists
between the selected subnet and any other portion on the network.

5-92

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3.

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Click Next to start searching for WDM trails. Wait until the status bar shows the end
of the searching.
NOTE

l If certain cross-connections conflict with each other and thus fail to form an end-to-end
trail, the information about these cross-connections is displayed in the search result when
the searching is complete. You can rectify the problem according to the conflict
information.
l Certain cross-connections may conflict with each other when the network architecture is
changed or a trail that may cause an interruption of service flows exists. You can determine
whether conflicting cross-connections exist by deleting certain routing information such
as deleting a cross-connection or a fiber

4.

Optional: Click Next to view the information about the conflicting trails. Right-click
a trail, you can configure it with a management flag.
NOTE

If you have selected Automatically create trails after searching in the search policies, skip
this step.
If you perform this step, the NMS will remove the trails that are not configured with
management flags from the network in the next step. The deletion does not affect the actual
services on the NE and the data of the NE saved on the NMS.

5.

Click Next to view all discrete services on the network.


NOTE

The possible causes of discrete services and the method for removing discrete services are as
follows:
l The data on the NE is inconsistent with that on the NMS. In this case, upload the
configuration data to the NMS.
l Fibers are created inappropriately and the created fiber connections are inconsistent with
the physical fiber connections. In this case, check and ensure that the fiber connections
created on the NMS are consistent with the physical fiber connections between real
equipment.
l NE configuration data is incorrect and service configuration is incomplete. In this case,
correct the NE configuration data and configure services completely.

6.

Click Finish.

----End

Reference Information

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tion
on the
T200
0

Configuring Services
by Creating WDM
Trails

You can configure services by creating WDM trails if the


following conditions are met: (1) NEs on the network are
not configured with services. (2) Fiber connections
between these NEs have been created on the T2000. (3)
All the NEs communicate with each other properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-93

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.16 Checking Configurations in the Commissioning


Process
Correct setting of each system parameter is the precondition for ensuring normal network
operation.
Check the configurations of NEs and boards according to Table 5-13 and rectify inappropriate
configurations, for example incorrect parameter settings and incomplete parameter settings.
Table 5-13 Configuration checklist
N
o.

Item

Associated Operation

Communication between NEs on the network is


normal and login to an NE is successful.

Searching and Creating NEs

NE IDs and names are changed properly according


to the customer planning requirements.

Changing NE IDs and Names

NE IP addresses are changed properly according to


the customer planning requirements.

Changing NE IP Addresses

When the network uses the HWECC communication


protocol, a proper extended ECC communication
mode is selected when the number of NEs that adopt
the extended ECC communication exceeds nine.

Setting the Ethernet Extended


ECC Communication

When the network uses IP over DCC communication


protocol, the IP over DCC protocol is configured
properly.

Configuring IP over DCC

Attributes of every WDM optical interface on a


board are set properly.

Setting Attributes of WDM


Optical Interfaces on Boards

In the case of the LQM2 or LQG, the crossconnections and SW SNCP protection are
configured properly.

Configuring CrossConnections

Intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection,


client-side 1+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1
optical channel protection are configured properly
for a planned optical interface.

Configuring Port Protection

5-94

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Configuring SW SNCP
Protection

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

N
o.

Item

Associated Operation

All NEs are synchronized with the NMS time and


NE performance monitoring can be enabled
normally.

Synchronizing the NE Time


with the NMS Time
Enabling NE Performance
Monitoring

TIP

In the actual commissioning and configuration process, you are recommended to check the configurations
of an NE after configuring the NE.

See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.17 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board


By backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can ensure that the NE automatically
restores to the normal state in case a power failure occurs. When you back up an NE database
to an SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the flash memory of the SCC board. After
a power-off reset occurs on the NE, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration data
from the flash memory and applies the data to the boards on this NE.

Prerequisite
You must have logged in to an NE.
The NE must be configured properly.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


The T2000 must be used.

Precautions
NOTE

After backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can restore the NE database from the SCC board
by performing a warm or cold reset on the SCC board.

Procedure
l

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management.

2.

Select the NE from the Function Tree, and then click

3.

In Configuration Data Management List, select an NE or multiple NEs of which


the database you want to back up. Click Back Up NE Data and select Back Up
Database to SCC. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click OK.

4.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-95

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Reference Information
Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tions
on the
T200
0

Compare the methods


of backing up and
restoring NE data

The backup or restored NE database can be saved on the


SCC board, NMS server, or NMS client. Different
storage locations determine different backup and
restoration methods.

Restore the NE
database from the SCC
board

When a database file is lost due to a factor such as NE


maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the DRDB
database that has been backed up in the flash memory of
the SCC board.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.18 Checking Optical Power of Boards


By checking the optical power of a board, you can ensure that the transmit and receive optical
power of the board is within the normal range. When commissioning the OptiX OSN 1800, you
can adjust the optical power of a board at the site by adding, replacing, or removing a fixed
optical attenuator (FOA) or adjusting a variable optical attenuator (VOA) before an optical
interface.

Prerequisite
The performance monitoring function must be enabled.
Fiber connections must be established properly and lasers must be enabled.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


The Web LCT or T2000 is used for querying the optical power of a board. The T2000 must be
used for querying the optical power of the entire network.

Procedure
l

5-96

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE Explorer, select the board whose optical power you need to query.

2.

Choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the Function Tree.

3.

Click Query to read the current optical power value from the NE.

4.

Ensure that the input optical power value for each optical interface is in the range of
Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Upper Threshold(dBm).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

If the input optical power value for an optical interface is greater than Input Power
Lower Threshold(dBm), add a FOA or replace the existing FOA before the
optical interface to ensure that the input optical power meets the design
requirement.
If the input optical power value is smaller than Input Power Upper Threshold
(dBm), do as follows:
Check the transmit optical power of the opposite board. If the transmit optical
power of this board is abnormal, replace the transmitter on this board.
Check whether appropriate FOAs are installed on the link against the FOA
installation table.
Check and clean the fiber endfaces and flanges on the ODF.
Check whether fiber jumpers are bent seriously or bundled too tightly.
If the attenuation of line fibers is excessive, recommend customers to rectify
the line fibers or add an REG station to ensure that the actual line attenuation
is smaller than the line attenuation specified in the design document.
TIP

At the site, you can also use the following methods to determine whether the input optical
power at an optical interface on a board meets the design requirement:
l Use an optical power meter to measure the input optical power at an optical interface. Then,
determine whether the input optical power is normal according to the permitted optical
power range.
l Check the status of the LED corresponding to this optical interface, such as IN, IN1, IN2,
IN3, IN4, RM1, or RM2, on the front panel of the board.
l Always on (red): indicates that the receive optical power is excessively low.
l Blink (red): indicates that the receive optical power is excessively high.
l Always on (green): indicates that the receive optical power is normal.

5.

Check the Output Power(dBm) value for each optical interface on the board. The
value must be within the specified range. If the value for an optical interface is outside
of the specified range, replace the optical module at the optical interface.
For detailed specifications of a board, see the Hardware Description.

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > Optical Power Management to display
the Optical Power Management window.

2.

Select the desired board in the NE list on the left of the window, and then click
.
TIP

By selecting all the NEs on the network, you can query the optical power of all these NEs at a
time.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

3.

On the right of the window, click Query. In the displayed dialog box, click Close.

4.

Optional: Customize the optical power management template as required. Right-click


the title and then choose Setting from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box,
select the desired parameters. Display or hide the selected parameters as required. You
can also change the position where a parameter is displayed and customize the width
of the display field and the parameter name. For example, in the case of a network
with no optical amplifier (OA) boards, you are recommended to hide the Pump Max
Output Power(dBm) and Pump Min Output Power(dBm) fields. After the setting,
click OK.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-97

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

TIP

After right-clicking the title, select a parameter directly to hide or display it as required.

5.

Set Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working Lower


Threshold(dBm).
The T2000 compares the obtained Input Power(dBm) with the Reference Working
Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) values
to determine whether the input optical power is normal. If Input Power(dBm) is in
the range of Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working
Lower Threshold(dBm), the input optical power is normal. If the input optical power
exceeds either of the preceding thresholds by less than 2 dB, the Input Power State
field is displayed as warning alert; if the deviation is greater than 2 dB, the input power
state is displayed as critical alert. The Reference Working Upper Threshold
(dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) fields have no default
values. If either of them is not set, the T2000 does not check for the input power state.
NOTE

If the Input Power Reference Value(dBm) field is set but the Reference Working Upper
Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) fields are not set, the
T2000 automatically generates Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference
Working Lower Threshold(dBm) field values according to Input Power Reference Value
(dBm). In this case, the following formulas must be satisfied:
l Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) = Input Power Reference Value(dBm) +
3dB
l Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) = Input Power Reference Value(dBm) 5dB
To ensure that the T2000 displays a correct power state, you are recommended to set the
Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold
(dBm) fields.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 1800, the Reference Working Upper Threshold
(dBm) and Input Power Upper Threshold(dBm) fields have the same value, and
the Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Lower
Threshold(dBm) fields have the same value.
6.

5-98

Check the value of the Input Power State field. If the field is displayed as Critical
Alert or Warning Alert, it indicates that the optical power of the specified optical
interface is outside of the normal range. In this case, proceed to analyze the problem.
That is, rectify this problem in the same way as used to rectify such a problem by using
the Web LCT.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

TIP

You can also compare Input Power(dBm) of each optical interface with Input Power Lower
Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Upper Threshold(dBm). If the input optical power is
outside of the range of Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Upper
Threshold(dBm), it indicates that the input optical power is abnormal.

7.

Set Output Power Reference Value(dBm).


Output Power Reference Value(dBm) must be set according to the output optical
power specification of the optical module at the specified optical interface. The T2000
compares the obtained Output Power(dBm) with the preset Output Power
Reference Value(dBm) to determine whether the output optical power is abnormal.
If Output Power(dBm) deviates from Output Power Reference Value(dBm) by
less than 2 dB, the T2000 displays Output Power State as normal; if the deviation is
2 dB to 4 dB, the T2000 displays Output Power State as Warning Alert; if the
deviation is greater than 4 dB, the T2000 displays Output Power State as Critical
Alert.

8.

Check Output Power(dBm) for each optical interface on the board according to the
value of Output Power State. The output optical power must be within the specified
range. If the output optical power at an optical interface is outside of the specified
range, replace the optical module at the optical interface.
NOTE

Whether Output Power State is correct depends on an appropriate setting of the Output
Power Reference Value(dBm). Thus, during the commissioning, set Output Power
Reference Value(dBm) properly according to the specification of the board and determine
whether the output optical power is normal.

9.

After customizing the optical power management template, save the template. In
future, you can apply the template directly instead of re-setting parameters. To save
the customized template, choose Filter by Template > Save As. In the displayed
dialog box, enter the template name and then click OK. The Operation Result dialog
box is displayed. Click Close.

----End

Reference Information

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

FAQ

The receive optical


power is normal but the
LDGF board reports
an OTU1_LOF alarm.

In the case of a board with the dual fed and selective


receiving function, if only optical interface 2 or 4 is in
normal state before the board is configured with
protection, the ESC communication will be unavailable.

The receive optical


power is normal but the
LDGF board reports a
LINK_ERR alarm.

If an FE interface on the LDGF board does not access any


service and the channel use status is set as used, the board
will report a LINK_ERR alarm.

The receive optical


power is normal but an
OTU board reports an
REM_SF alarm.

If the OTU board at the remote end does not access any
service on the client side, the OTU board at the local end
will report an REM_SF alarm.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-99

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tion

Commission optical
power

If a query operation shows that the optical power is


abnormal, you may need to commission the optical power
at the site. In this case, see this section to learn the method
and procedure for commissioning optical power.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.19 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FEC


The count of bit errors before and after FEC is a key specification for measuring the system
operation quality.

Prerequisite
The performance monitoring function must be enabled and the current NE time must be within
the specified performance monitoring time range.
FEC Working State of an OTU board must be set to Enabled.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Precautions

CAUTION
During the deployment commissioning, ensure that the bit errors before FEC meet the customer
requirements and the bit errors after FEC is zero by taking into account the line attenuation and
the configurations.

Procedure
l

5-100

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.

2.

Choose Performance > Current Performance from the Function Tree.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

3.

In Performance Event Type, select the desired item and then click Query.

4.

View the current values in Performance Event and Performance Value.

Operations on the T2000


Regardless of whether the deployment commissioning is performed by using the T2000 or
Web LCT, the requirements on the bit errors before and after FEC are the same.
1.

In the Main Menu, choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance. Then, in
the displayed window click the Current Performance Data tab.

2.

In Monitored Object Filter Condition, select All, and then in the Monitor Period
field select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.

3.

In the Navigation Tree, select one or more NEs, and then click

4.

Click the Count tab. In Performance Event Type, click Select All.

5.

Click Query, and the Query Current Performance Data dialog box is displayed
showing the query progress.

6.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End

Reference Information

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tions
on the
Web
LCT

Set performance
thresholds for a
specified board

When an NE detects that a certain performance value


exceeds the specified threshold, the NE reports a
corresponding performance event. See this section to
learn how to change a performance threshold of a
specified board.

Set performance
monitoring parameters
of a board

The Web LCT/T2000 can monitor the performance of all


boards on a network. The automatic reporting of detected
performance values, however, is disabled by default. You
can change the default setting as required.

Set performance
monitoring parameters
of an NE

Set the performance monitoring parameters of a specified


NE properly and then enable the NE performance
monitoring function. By doing so, you can obtain detailed
description of performance records during the operation
of the NE. This facilitates monitoring of the existing
services and the equipment status.

Reset the performance


register of a board

After a network test or fault recovery, you need to reset


the performance register of a board as required before the
board is put into operation. This is to start a new
performance monitoring period.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-101

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.20 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing


Abnormal Alarms
Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exception
on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.

Prerequisite
The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000. When you need to view alarms on all NEs on the network, use the
T2000.

Procedure
l

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Alarm > Browse Alarms
from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click the Browse Current
Alarms tab.

2.

Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. In the case of on-site maintenance,
handle Critical and Major alarms before handling other abnormal alarms.
Analyze and handle alarms one by one according to the network situations. According
to network conditions, certain alarms are reported inevitably, whereas certain alarms
cannot be reported. For example, in general no service is accessed on the WDM side
during deployment commissioning. In this case, relevant alarms are reported
inevitably. These alarms, however, are cleared automatically after real services are
accessed on the client side.
In the commissioning and configuration phases of deployment, you need to analyze
every reported alarm. In general, focus on the following alarms:
Optical power low or high alarm
Temperature threshold-crossing alarm
Abnormal communication alarm
Bit error-related alarm
Abnormal service alarm
To handle a reported alarm, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.

Operations on the T2000


1.

5-102

Click the critical alarm indicator


view all the current critical alarms.

(red) on the upper right of the window to

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

NOTE

The figure in the middle of the indicator displays the number of the current critical alarms on
the entire network. When the alarm indicator is circled with a rectangle (see
indicates that there are critical alarms left unconfirmed.

2.

), it

Optional: Do as follows to display only the current alarms. On the lower left of the
list, choose Filter by Template > New to create an alarm filter template.
(1) In the Add Template dialog box, enter the template name in the Template
name field and then click Next.
(2) On the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tab pages, set alarm filtering conditions.
(3) Click Finish. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.
NOTE

You can create multiple alarm filter templates as required. Thus, you can filter out unnecessary
alarms directly next time by selecting an appropriate alarm filter template. To select an alarm
filter template, click Template in the window and then select the template name.

3.

Click the major alarm indicator


view all the current major alarms.

(orange) on the upper right of the window to

NOTE

The figure in the middle of the indicator displays the number of the current major alarms on
the entire network. When the alarm indicator is circled with a rectangle (see
indicates that there are major alarms left unconfirmed.

4.

Click the minor alarm indicator


view all the current minor alarms.

), it

(yellow) on the upper right of the window to

NOTE

The figure in the middle of the indicator displays the number of the current minor alarms on
the entire network. When the alarm indicator is circled with a rectangle (see
indicates that there are minor alarms left unconfirmed.

), it

TIP

In addition to the preceding navigation path to viewing current alarms, you can also choose
Fault > Browse Current Alarm in the Main Menu. Then, in the displayed Filter dialog box,
set the alarm filter conditions on the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tab page.

5.

Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. For details, see the description of
the methods for analyzing and handling alarms by using the Web LCT.

----End

Reference Information

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

FAQ

The optical path is


reachable but the NE
cannot be logged in to
remotely.

In the case of a board with the dual fed and selective


receiving function, if only optical interface 2 or 4 is in
normal state before the board is configured with
protection, the ESC communication will be unavailable.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-103

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tion

Commission optical
power

If a query operation shows that the optical power is


abnormal, you may need to commission the optical power
at the site. In this case, read this section to learn the
method and procedure for commissioning optical power.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.21 Testing Protection Switching


In the commissioning or configuration phase, you can run a manual switching command to check
whether protection switching can be performed normally.
5.21.1 Testing SW SNCP Switching
After configuring SW SNCP protection, you can run a manual switching command to check
whether the SW SNCP switching can be performed successfully.
5.21.2 Testing Port Protection Switching
In the case of intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and
inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection, you can run a manual switching command in a
same user interface.

5.21.1 Testing SW SNCP Switching


After configuring SW SNCP protection, you can run a manual switching command to check
whether the SW SNCP switching can be performed successfully.

Prerequisite
The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly.
Protection groups must be configured correctly.
The working and protection channels of a protection group on the network must be in normal
state.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

5-104

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Precautions

CAUTION
In the case of revertive protection, services can be switched only to the protection channel by
performing a manual switching.

Procedure
l

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE list, select the NE where an SW SNCP protection group is configured. Rightclick the NE and then choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu to display the NE
Explorer window.

2.

Choose Configuration > Subwavelength SNCP Service from the Function Tree.

3.

Click Query to view the values of the Channel Status and Revertive Mode fields of
the working and protection cross-connections of all the existing SW SNCP protection
groups on the NE.
Regardless of the working or protection cross-connections, the value of the Channel
Status field should be Normal.
NOTE

If the value of the Channel Status field of a working or protection cross-connection is not
Normal, check whether the channel corresponding to this cross-connection is in normal state.
Proceed with the protection switching test after rectifying the fault.

4.

Right-click the desired protection group and choose Manual to Working channel or
Manual to Protection channel. Observe the changes in parameter values and
determine whether protection switching can be performed successfully.
When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Non-Revertive:
After you choose Manual to Protection Channel from the right-click menu, the
protection switching should be performed successfully and the working crossconnection becomes the protection cross-connection.
After you choose Manual to Working Channel from the right-click menu, the
protection switching should be performed successfully and the protection crossconnection becomes the work cross-connection.
When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Revertive:
After you choose Manual to Protection Channel from the right-click menu, the
protection switching should be performed successfully and the working crossconnection becomes the protection cross-connection. After the time specified in
the WTR Time (s) field elapses, the protection cross-connection of the protection
group automatically restores to the working cross-connection.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-105

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network


NOTE

If the protection switching fails or an exception occurs in the protection switching process after
you run a manual switching command, check whether the channel corresponding to the working
or protection cross-connection is in normal state, and whether the protection group and the
working and protection cross-connections are configured properly. Proceed with the protection
switching test after removing the fault.

Operations on the T2000


1.

Select the NE where the SW SNCP protection group is configured. In the NE


Explorer window of this NE, choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click the SNCP
Service Control tab.

2.

Click Query to view the status of all the existing protection groups on the NE. Click
Function to display a drop-down list. Then, run manual switching commands on each
protection group in turn to determine whether protection switching can be performed
successfully for the protection group. The operations and precautions are the same as
those when the protection switching test is performed by using the Web LCT.

----End

Reference Information
Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tions
on the
Web
LCT

Delete a crossconnection

See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.

Convert a service with


SNCP protection into a
service with no
protection

A service with SNCP protection can be converted into a


service with no protection.

Para
meter
descr
iption

WDM crossconnection
configuration

See this section to learn how to set the parameters used


for configuring a WDM cross-connection.

SNCP service control

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for


controlling services with SNCP protection.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5-106

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

5.21.2 Testing Port Protection Switching


In the case of intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and
inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection, you can run a manual switching command in a
same user interface.

Prerequisite
The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly.
Protection groups must be configured correctly.
The working and protection channels of a port protection group on the network must be in normal
state.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


Web LCT or T2000

Precautions

CAUTION
In the case of revertive protection, services can be switched only to the protection channel by
performing a manual switching.

Procedure
l

Operations on the Web LCT


1.

In the NE list, select the NE where a port protection group is configured. Right-click
the NE and then choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu to display the NE
Explorer window.

2.

Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.

3.

Click Query to view the values of the Current Channel, Working Channel
Status, and Protection Channel Status fields of all the existing protection groups on
the NE.
The values of the Working Channel Status and Protection Channel Status fields
should be Normal.
NOTE

If the value of the Working Channel Status or Protection Channel Status is not Normal,
check the working or protection channel. Proceed with the protection switching test after
removing the fault.

4.

Right-click the desired protection group and choose Manual to Working channel or
Manual to Protection channel. Observe the changes in parameter values and
determine whether protection switching can be performed successfully.
When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Non-Revertive:

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-107

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

If Current Channel of the protection group is set to Work, select Manual to


Protection channel from the right-click menu. If the manual switching is
successful, the value of Current Channel changes to Protection. Later, choose
Clear Switching from the right-click menu to clear the current protection setting.
After that, choose Manual to Working channel from the right-click menu. If the
manual switching is successful, the value of Current Channel changes to
Work.
If Current Channel of the protection group is set to Protection, select Manual
to Working channel from the right-click menu. If the manual switching is
successful, the value of Current Channel changes to Work. Later, choose Clear
Switching from the right-click menu to clear the current protection setting. After
that, choose Manual to Protection channel from the right-click menu. If the
manual switching is successful, the value of Current Channel changes to
Protection.
When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Revertive:
If Current Channel of the protection group is set to Work, choose Manual to
Protection channel from the right-click menu. If the manual switching is
successful, the value of Current Channel changes to Protection. After the time
specified in the WTR Time (s) field elapses, the value of Current Channel
automatically restores to Work.
If Current Channel is set to Protection, the value of Current Channel
automatically restores to Work after the time specified in the WTR Time (s) field
elapses.
NOTE

If the protection switching fails or an exception occurs in the protection switching process after
you run a manual switching command, check whether the protection or working channel is in
normal state, and whether the protection group configuration is correct. Proceed with the
protection switching test after removing the fault.

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the NE Explorer window of the NE where a port protection group is configured,


choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query to view the status of all the existing protection groups on the NE. Then,
run manual switching commands on each protection group in turn to determine
whether protection switching can be performed successfully for the protection group.
The operations and precautions are the same as those when the protection switching
test is performed by using the Web LCT.

----End

Reference Information

5-108

Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

Para
meter
descr
iption

Port protection

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for


configuring port protection.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.22 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power


and Alarm Data
After commissioning a network, you need to query and save the optical power and alarm data
of the entire network. This type of data can help you analyze and understand the operating status
of the network in future.

Prerequisite
The performance monitoring function must be enabled.
Fiber connections must be established properly and lasers must be enabled.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


The T2000 must be used for querying the optical power and alarms of the entire network.

Procedure
l

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > Optical Power Management to display
the Optical Power Management window.

2.

Optional: If an optical power management template has already been customized,


you can use this template to filter out unnecessary optical power managed objects. To
invoke this template, do as follows. Choose Filter by Template > Apply. In the
displayed dialog box, select the required template. Then, click Apply.

3.

In the NE list on the left of the window, click

4.

In the pane on the right of the window, click Query. In the displayed dialog box, click
Close.

5.

Check the optical power on the entire network and ensure that the optical power of all
the equipment on the network is proper.

6.

Optional: Set the current optical power of the entire network to this reference value.
This will facilitate future maintenance of the network. Click Reset Networkwide
Reference Value. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation
Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

TIP

After all the commissioning and configuration tasks are performed during deployment, the
optical power of the network obtained at the time when the network starts working is the
reference value indicating the optimal performance of the network.

7.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Click Save As. Select the path for saving the optical power report and enter the name
for this report. After that, click Save. At this point, the optical power data of the entire
network is saved on the specified path.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-109

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

8.

In the Main Menu, choose Fault > Browse Current Alarms. In the displayed
Filter window, set the alarm filter conditions on the Basic Setting and Alarm
Source tab pages. Click OK.
NOTE

To save all the data of the current alarms, ensure that all the alarms can be displayed properly
when setting alarm filter conditions.

9.

Click Synchronize. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close to
synchronize the alarm data on the NE with that on the NMS.

10. Click Save As. Select the path for saving the alarm data and enter the file name. After
that, click OK. At this point, the data of the current alarms is saved on the specified
path.
----End

Reference Information
Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tions

Check optical power of


boards

If the obtained optical power is outside of the normal


range, see this section to learn how to rectify a problem
with abnormal optical power.

Query current alarms


on an NE and remove
abnormal alarms

If a query of alarms shows that abnormal alarms are


generated at that time on the network, see this section to
learn how to handle an abnormal alarm.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5.23 Backing Up NE Data to the NMS Server or Client


You can manually back up the data of one or more NEs of the same type to an NMS server or
client.

Prerequisite
The path for saving the backup data and the TFTP/FTP/SFTP server must be configured and the
TFTP/FTP/SFTP service must be started.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


The T2000 must be used when you back up NE data to an NMS server or client.

5-110

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

Precautions
NOTE

Observe the following precautions when backing up NE data to an NMS server or client:
l The backup operation can be performed to multiple NEs at the same time if these NEs are of the same
type.
l If you select a node of a certain NE type in the Navigation Tree, the Device View tab page displays
the information and version information of all the NEs of this type.
l The Backup Information tab page displays the information of the backup file.

Procedure
l

Operations on the T2000


1.

In the Main Menu, choose Data Center > Device Operation. The Device View list
is displayed.

2.

In the Device View list, right-click the NE whose data you want to back up and then
choose Backup from the shortcut menu. The Backup dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

When multiple NEs are selected, the Basic Information tab is unavailable.

3.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Select NMS Server or NMS Client to back up the data of the selected NE to the NMS
server or client.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-111

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network

NOTE

NMS Server is selected by default. If you select NMS Client, the data of the selected NE is
backed up to the NMS client.

4.

Optional: If you select NMS Server, you also need to click


for saving the backup NE data.

5.

Click Start, and then the Device View page displays the backup progress. In this case,
wait until the data of the selected NE is backed up.

to select the path

----End

Reference Information
Clas
sific
ation

Item

Description

(Opti
onal)
Asso
ciate
d
opera
tions
on the
T200
0

Compare the methods


of backing up and
restoring NE data

The backup or restored NE database can be saved on the


SCC board, NMS server, or NMS client. Different
storage locations determine different backup and
restoration methods.

Restore NE data from


the NMS server or
client

After backing up NE data to the NMS server or client,


you can see this section to learn how to restore NE data
from the NMS server or client.

Postrequisite
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the
subsequent task.

5-112

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

A Handling Common Commissioning Problems

Handling Common Commissioning


Problems

This chapter describes the methods of analyzing and handling the most common problems
happening in the deployment process. You need to analyze and handle problems according to
actual situations.
In the commissioning or configuration phase of deployment, alarms are generally generated
when a problem happens. For example, alarms are generated if no service is received on the
client side or if the configuration is incomplete. You need to analyze each alarm reported by
equipment to determine which alarms do not reflect abnormal running status and which alarms
indicate running status in the current engineering conditions. Abnormal alarms must be handled
properly in the commissioning or configuration phase of deployment.
Equipment may report various alarms. Different alarms have different causes. This chapter
describes the common causes of the common alarms and the common methods of handling such
alarms generated during deployment. There may be other causes of such alarms. Thus, analyze
and handle alarms in the commissioning or configuration phase of deployment according to
actual situations. For details on how to handle alarms of the OptiX OSN 1800, see the Alarms
and Performance Events Reference.
When reporting an alarm, the NMS also displays the position where the alarm is generated.
Determine the slot, board name, and optical interface where the alarm is generated according to
the displayed position information. For example, 1-LDGF2-201(LP1/LP1)-OTU1:1. In the case
of the LDGF2 board, 201(LP1/LP1) indicates the IN1 and IN2 optical interfaces, and 202(LP2/
LP2) indicates the IN3 and IN4 optical interfaces. The digit 1 at the end of the position
information indicates the IN1 or IN3 optical interface. If the digit is 2, it indicates the IN2 or
IN4 optical interface. That is, 1-LDGF2-201(LP1/LP1)-OTU1:1 indicates that the alarm is
generated at the IN1 optical interface on the LDGF2 board in slot 1. The indication of the position
information for other boards is similar.
A.1 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports an OTU1_LOF Alarm
A.2 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports a LINK_ERR Alarm
A.3 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LWX2 Board Reports the R_LOC Alarm
A.4 The Receive Optical Power is Normal But an OTU Board Reports an REM_SF Alarm
A.5 The Optical Path Is Reachable But the NE Cannot Be Logged in Remotely

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

A Handling Common Commissioning Problems

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

A.1 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF


Board Reports an OTU1_LOF Alarm
Keywords
LDGF, OTU1_LOF, LWX2 regeneration board

Symptom
The receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal but the board reports
an OTU1_LOF alarm.
The LDGF board that reports an OTU1_LOF alarm works with the LWX2 regeneration board.
Figure A-1 shows the network where the LDGF and LWX2 board are used. The ALS function
of a laser on the LWX2 regeneration board is disabled and all lasers on this board are enabled.
As shown in Figure A-1, the optical cable between the two LWX2 regeneration boards is
unavailable. That is, the optical path between the two regeneration boards is absent. Thus, the
downstream LWX2 regeneration board reports an R_LOS alarm.
Figure A-1 LDGF board networking mode

IN1

OUT1
L
D
G
F IN1
2

L
W
X
2

L
W
X
2

L
D
G
OUT1
F

Cause Analysis
The receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal but the board reports
an OTU1_LOF alarm. This indicates that the frame structure of the received optical signals is
invalid or the board is faulty. In general, the probability that the board is faulty is very small.
Thus, you can first check whether the received optical signals are normal.
As described previously, the upstream optical path is unavailable, and thus the downstream
LWX2 regeneration board cannot receive valid optical signals. The lasers on the downstream
LWX2 regeneration board, however, are forcibly enabled. Thus, the downstream LWX2
regeneration board transmits white light signals that have no frame structure. Thus, although
optical power of the optical signals received by the LDGF, the LDGF board reports an
OTU1_LOF alarm because the received optical signals have no frame structure.
A-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

A Handling Common Commissioning Problems

Procedure
After an analysis, this is normal for the LDGF board to an OTU1_LOF alarm in the current
engineering situation. When the optical cable between the two LWX2 regeneration boards is
installed and the optical path between them are present, the OTU1_LOF alarm will be cleared
automatically.

Reference Information
None.

A.2 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF


Board Reports a LINK_ERR Alarm
Keywords
LDGF, LINK_ERR

Symptom
The receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal, the ETH port,
however, reports the LINK_ERR alarm. No service gains access to the ETH port on the LDGF
board where the alarm is reported.

Cause Analysis
The LINK_ERR alarm indicates that valid links between two data ports fail to be established,
however, the receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal and the line
is normal.
No service gains access to the ETH port on the LDGF board, and therefore valid links fail to be
established and the LINK_ERR alarm is reported.

Procedure
Under the current engineering condition, the situation is normal.
1.

If the ETH port on the LDGF board is planned to access services in the network planning,
the alarm is cleared automatically after the ETH port accesses services normally.

2.

If the ETH port on the LDGF board is not planned to access services in the network
planning, set the ETH channel to unused so that the channel does not detect the alarms that
are irrelevant with normal network operation.

Reference Information
None.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

A Handling Common Commissioning Problems

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

A.3 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LWX2


Board Reports the R_LOC Alarm
Keywords
LWX2, R_LOC, interconnected equipment

Symptom
The client side of the LWX2 board interconnects with the client equipment to access the STM-16
service. The optical interface of the client equipment reports the R_LOS alarm, the client side
of the LWX2 board and the corresponding WDM side report the R_LOC alarm, and the service
is unavailable.

Cause Analysis
Check the optical power. The result shows that the receive optical power values on the client
equipment and the client and WDM sides of LWX2 board are normal.
Query the WDM interface attributes of the LWX2 board to check whether the board
configuration is correct. The result shows that the service rates on the client and WDM sides of
the LWX2 board are set to 2488.3 Mbit/s and 2667.0 Mbit/s respectively. Because the LWX2
board is a service transparent transmission board, the service rates on the client and WDM sides
of the LWX2 board must be the same as the rate of the service that is actually accessed.
Otherwise, the R_LOC alarm is reported and the service is unavailable.

Procedure
The R_LOC alarm is reported because the service rate on the WDM side of the LWX2 board is
different from the actual service rate. Change the service rate on the WDM side of the board to
2488.3 Mbit/s, and the symptom disappears and the service is available.

Reference Information
Regardless of whether the LWX2 board is used as a service transparent transmission board or a
regeneration board, the service rates on the client and WDM sides of the board must be the same
as the rate of the service that is actually accessed. Otherwise, the service is unavailable.

A.4 The Receive Optical Power is Normal But an OTU Board


Reports an REM_SF Alarm
Keywords
OTU, REM_SF, client-side service
A-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

A Handling Common Commissioning Problems

Symptom
As shown in Figure A-2, the receive optical power of the OTU board is normal but the client
side of the OTU board at station A reports the REM_SF alarm.
Figure A-2 Schematic diagram of the OTU board reporting the REM_SF alarm
RX

TX

IN1

TX

O
T
OUT1 U

RX

OUT1
O
T
U IN1

Cause Analysis
The REM_SF alarm indicates that the receive signals on the client side of the OTU board at the
opposite station fail. At the deployment commissioning phase, no service gains access to the
client side of the OTU board at station B, and therefore the alarm is reported.

Procedure
After services gain access to the client side of the OTU board at station B, the alarm is cleared.

Reference Information
None.

A.5 The Optical Path Is Reachable But the NE Cannot Be


Logged in Remotely
Keywords
LDGF2, NE unreachable, remote login

Symptom
The communication between stations A and B is achieved through only the ESC provided by
the LDGF2 board. Because the optical fibers are not connected at the deployment commissioning
phase, the optical paths of IN1/OUT1 on the LDGF2 board are unavailable. The optical paths
of IN2/OUT2, however, are normal. See Figure A-3. Station B cannot be logged in remotely at
station A.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-5

A Handling Common Commissioning Problems

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Figure A-3 Schematic diagram of the network of the LDGF2 board


IN1

OUT1
L
D
IN1
G
F OUT2
2

L
D
OUT1
G
IN2 F
2
OUT2

IN2

Cause Analysis
The LDGF2 board receives ESC overhead bytes through the channels of IN1/OUT1. The optical
paths of IN1/OUT1 on the LDGF2 board are unavailable. Therefore, the ESC overhead bytes
fail to be received, communication between NEs fails to be established, and the NE fails to be
logged in remotely.

Procedure
Under the current engineering condition, establish normal communication routes according to
the network planning:
l

Configure intra-board 1+1 protection on the LDGF2 boards at stations A and B respectively
to establish normal communication between the two stations by using the channels of IN2/
OUT2.

Restore the fiber connections.

Reference Information
In the case of the OTU boards with the dual fed and selective receiving function, before the
protection is configured, overhead bytes are received through only the channels of IN1/OUT1
or IN3/OUT3. If the optical paths of IN1/OUT1 or IN3/OUT3 are unavailable, the ESC
communication fails even if the optical paths of IN2/OUT2 or IN4/OUT4 are normal. After the
protection is configured, the ESC communication is normal even if only one channel is normal.

A-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

Reference Operations for the

Commissioning and Configuration


This chapter lists the reference operations for the commissioning and configuration. You can
perform proper operations according to the network condition.
B.1 Obtaining NE IP Addresses at the Site
In the case of onsite commissioning, if the T2000 or Web LCT is unavailable, you can obtain
the IP address of an NE by running a command directly in the Windows operating system.
B.2 Creating a Single NE
Creating NEs one by one is not as quick and precise as the batch creation. However, creating
NEs one by one is applicable no matter what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs
that use serial ports to communicate do not support the NE search function and you must create
them one by one.
B.3 Checking the NE Software Version
This topic describes how to check the NE software version.
B.4 Creating an NE User
To ensure NE data security, only the users with NE user authority can log in to the NEs. An NE
user is able to perform operations on the NEs according to the assigned authority. The Web
LCT administrator is advised to create NE users before configuring services.
B.5 Switching a Logged-In NE User
During a new deployment, after the lct NE user creates an NE, this user can create another NE
user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.
B.6 Modifying the Optical NE Name
You can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the running of
the NE.
B.7 Modifying GNE Parameters
During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or
modify the communication address.
B.8 Changing the GNE for NEs
When the GNE that the non-gateway NE belongs to is changed and this non-gateway NE does
not belong to another GNE, you need to change the GNE to maintain the communication between
the NEs and the T2000. When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain
number (the number is usually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment), change
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-1

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

the GNE for certain NEs so that the communication between the T2000 and the NEs is not
affected.
B.9 Deleting an NE
When you need to adjust the network topology or have created a wrong NE, you can delete the
NE from the Web LCT. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the Web LCT
but does not affect the running of the equipment.
B.10 Enabling the Proxy ARP
The address resolution protocol (ARP) helps you to query the MAC address of the destination
equipment using its IP address. If you enable proxy ARP for a gateway NE, the gateway NE can
answer ARP requests for other non-gateway NEs, so that you can set IP addresses of NEs of the
same network in the same network segment.
B.11 Configuring Static Routing
If the NE adopts IP over DCC and direction communication connection mode, you need to
configure a static route between the NM computer and the NE.
B.12 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status
Enable the OSPF protocol so that the routing information on the gateway NE can be
automatically diffused to other NEs.
B.13 Configuring the NE Data
Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first
so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE.
B.14 Configuring Boards
In the NE Panel, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.
B.15 Performance Management
To ensure the normal functioning of the network, the network management and maintenance
personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance
management measures.
B.16 Modifying the Services Configuration
After a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the service
based on the following task sets.
B.17 Switching the Working Mode of the LQM2
The default working mode of the LQM2 board is 2LQM Mode. When the working mode is
switched to AP8 Mode, you need to configure the board and add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface
according to this section.
B.18 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data
For the security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.
B.19 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode
In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside
NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the
list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few
fiber connections only.
B.20 Configuring Services by Creating WDM Trails
You can configure services on NEs by creating OCh, ODUk, or client trails. To create an OCh,
ODUk, or client trail, you need to search for or create the information about the trail at the
corresponding server layer and then specify the source and sink of the OCh, ODUk, or client
trail.

B-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

B.1 Obtaining NE IP Addresses at the Site


In the case of onsite commissioning, if the T2000 or Web LCT is unavailable, you can obtain
the IP address of an NE by running a command directly in the Windows operating system.

Prerequisite
The NMS computer must run on Windows and must be connected to the NE directly by using
an Ethernet cable.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


None.

Background Information
You can use the LAMP button on the SCC board to restore the default IP address of the equipment
on site.
Press the LAMP button on the SCC board and hold it for five to ten seconds. Then, release the
button and wait for five to ten seconds.
Press the button again and hold it for five to ten seconds. Then, release the button and wait for
five to ten seconds.
Press the button for the third time and hold it for more than five seconds, and then release the
button.
In this manner, the IP address of the equipment can be restored.
NOTE

The default IP address is 129.9.191.240.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the IP address of the NMS computer to ensure that the NMS computer is located on the 129.9
network segment. For example, set the IP address to 129.9.0.254.
Step 2 On the Windows, choose Start > Run and then enter cmd in the command line interface to enter
the DOS system. In the DOS system, enter ping 129.9.255.255.
Step 3 When the timeout response is complete, enter arp -a.
Step 4 The IP address of the NE is displayed in the Internet Address column.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-3

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

----End

B.2 Creating a Single NE


Creating NEs one by one is not as quick and precise as the batch creation. However, creating
NEs one by one is applicable no matter what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs
that use serial ports to communicate do not support the NE search function and you must create
them one by one.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Add NE in the NE list.
The Add NE dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Enter an NE ID and an Extended ID.
Step 3 Select Gateway Type and set related parameters.
l If the gateway type is IP Gateway, set IP Address and Port.

l If the gateway type is Serial Port, set Port and Baud Rate.

B-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

NOTE

The range of ID is from 1 to 49135.

Step 4 Enter the User Name and the Password.


The default NE user is lct and the default password is password.
Step 5 Click OK.
One entry is added in the NE list. Usually the NE communicates normally and is in the Logged
In state.
----End

Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l

The communication between the T2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings of
communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID.

The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.

The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.

B.3 Checking the NE Software Version


This topic describes how to check the NE software version.

Background Information
The NE software version refers to the version of the SCC board of the NE.
NOTE

The SCC board refers to the system control and communication unit. The SCC board interoperates with
the T2000 to manage the boards of the equipment and realize the communication between the equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, double-click the desired NE. The NE panel is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click the SCC board and then choose SCC Version from the shortcut menu.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-5

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step 3 In the Prompt dialog box, view the NE software version.


Step 4 Click OK.
----End

B.4 Creating an NE User


To ensure NE data security, only the users with NE user authority can log in to the NEs. An NE
user is able to perform operations on the NEs according to the assigned authority. The Web
LCT administrator is advised to create NE users before configuring services.

Prerequisite
You must log in the NE to create an NE user.

Context
The default NE user has the monitor level authority. To ensure NE data security, it is
recommended that you assign NE users with different authorities as required. Refer to
Parameters: NE User Management.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Click and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Enter the NE user name in the field.
NOTE

The NE user name must contain letters, or it can be a combination of letters, symbols and numerals. The
NE user name contains at least 4, but not more than 16 characters.

Step 4 Select the as needed.


Step 5 Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password
field.
B-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

NOTE

The password is a string of 6-16 characters. It can consist of letters, symbols and numerals, and must contain
at least one letter and one numeral.

Step 6 Click OK.


----End

B.5 Switching a Logged-In NE User


During a new deployment, after the lct NE user creates an NE, this user can create another NE
user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.

Prerequisite
The NE user must be created.

Background Information
An NE user cannot log in to or manage an NE at multiple clients at the same time. After you use
an NE user to log in to an NE through a T2000 server, if you use the same NE user to log in to
the same NE through another T2000 server, the NE user is forced to log out from the first
T2000 server.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, select one or more NEs that are logged in and click NE Logout. The NE status
becomes Not Logged In.
Step 2 Click NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Enter the User Name and the Password.
Step 4 Click OK. In the NE List, the Login Status changes to Logged In.
----End

B.6 Modifying the Optical NE Name


You can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the running of
the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click an optical NE on the Main Topology and choose Attribute from the shortcut menu.
The NE Attribute dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Enter the new optical NE name and click OK.
NOTE

An Optical NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters, symbols, and numerals, but cannot contain the
following special characters: | : * ? " < >.

----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-7

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B.7 Modifying GNE Parameters


During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or
modify the communication address.

Precautions

CAUTION
This is a potential service affecting operation. Specifically, it may interrupt the communication
between a GNE and the T2000, and the communication between the GNE and the non-gateway
NEs that are managed by the GNE.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > DCN Management from the Main Menu. Click the GNE tab.
Step 2 Select the GNE to be modified, right-click and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu.
Step 3 In the Modify GNE dialog box displayed, set Gateway Type the parameters.

NOTE

l It is not recommended to modify the Port No..


l Make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network segment as the IP address of the
T2000. When the T2000 server and the GNE are in different network segments, you need to set the
network port attributes of the router through which the T2000 server and the GNE are connected. In
this way, the T2000 can log in to the GNE.

Step 4 Click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
----End

B.8 Changing the GNE for NEs


When the GNE that the non-gateway NE belongs to is changed and this non-gateway NE does
not belong to another GNE, you need to change the GNE to maintain the communication between
the NEs and the T2000. When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain
B-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

number (the number is usually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment), change
the GNE for certain NEs so that the communication between the T2000 and the NEs is not
affected.

Precautions

CAUTION
This operation may interrupt the NE communication.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > DCN Management from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Click the NE tab.
Step 3 Select an NE. Double-click the Primary GNE1 field and select a GNE from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
Step 5 Click Refresh.
----End

B.9 Deleting an NE
When you need to adjust the network topology or have created a wrong NE, you can delete the
NE from the Web LCT. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the Web LCT
but does not affect the running of the equipment.

Prerequisite
Fibers and cables connected to the NE must be deleted.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, select the NE you wish to delete, and click Delete NE.
Step 2 Click OK.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-9

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B.10 Enabling the Proxy ARP


The address resolution protocol (ARP) helps you to query the MAC address of the destination
equipment using its IP address. If you enable proxy ARP for a gateway NE, the gateway NE can
answer ARP requests for other non-gateway NEs, so that you can set IP addresses of NEs of the
same network in the same network segment.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Background Information
When the Web LCT and the gateway NE are directly connected through LAN and the IP
addresses of the Web LCT and the gateway NE are in the same network segment, when the
remote NEs connect to the gateway NE through fibers, and when the IP addresses of the remote
NEs, the gateway NE, and the Web LCT are in the same subnet, there are requirements that the
Web LCT accesses the NEs on the entire network through the gateway NE and the upper layer
application requirement of accessing remote NEs based on the IP network layer. To meet the
upper layer application requirement of accessing remote NEs based on the IP network layer, you
need to enable the proxy ARP of the gateway NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack
Management from the Function Tree. Click the Proxy ARP tab.
Step 2 Optional: Click Query.
Step 3 Double-click Value and select Disabled or Enabled from the drop-down list.
Step 4 Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
----End

Postrequisite
After you enable proxy ARP, you need to create a static route for each NE.

B.11 Configuring Static Routing


If the NE adopts IP over DCC and direction communication connection mode, you need to
configure a static route between the NM computer and the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired NE from the object tree. Then choose Communication > IP Stack Protocol
Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IP Route Management tab.
Step 3 Click New. Configure the following parameters in the Create an IP Route dialog box.
B-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

NOTE

l Destination Address: the IP address of the NE that requires communication


l Subnet Mask: the network mask code of the subnet where an NE resides
l Gateway IP: the IP address of the forwarding NE

Step 4 Click Apply.


----End

B.12 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status


Enable the OSPF protocol so that the routing information on the gateway NE can be
automatically diffused to other NEs.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Background Information
The OSPF protocol is enabled by default.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack
Management from the Function Tree. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
Step 2 Click Query to check if the OSPF protocol status is normal.
----End

Postrequisite
If the OSPF protocol is incorrect, please contact Huawei engineers to adjust the OSPF protocol
parameters used by the NEs.

B.13 Configuring the NE Data


Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first
so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE.
B.13.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually
By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.
B.13.2 Uploading the NE Data
By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network
management system directly.

B.13.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually


By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-11

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
The NE must be created successfully.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click an unconfigured NE in the NE information list and choose Configuration from the
shortcut menu. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating
that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side.
Step 3 Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual configuration interrupts
the service on the NE.
Step 4 Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Optional: If you need to modify the NE Attribute, set NE Name, Equipment Type, NE
Remarks, and Subrack Type.
Step 6 Click Next, and the NE slot window is displayed.
Step 7 Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE.
Step 8 Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE.
Step 9 Optional: Right-click on the slot to add a board.
Step 10 Click Next to display the Send Configuration window.
Step 11 Select Verify and Run as required and click Finish.
NOTE

Verification involves running the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration to the
NE and complete the basic configurations for the NE. After the verification is successful, the NE starts to
work normally.

----End

B.13.2 Uploading the NE Data


By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network
management system directly.

Prerequisite
The NE must be created successfully.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click an unconfigured NE in the NE information list and choose Configuration from the
shortcut menu. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select Upload and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the upload
may take a long time.
Step 3 Click OK to start the upload. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed when the uploading
is complete.
B-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

Step 4 Click Close.


----End

B.14 Configuring Boards


In the NE Panel, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.
B.14.1 Adding Boards
When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can
either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do
not exist on the actual equipment.
B.14.2 Deleting Boards
To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards
from the NE Panel.

B.14.1 Adding Boards


When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can
either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do
not exist on the actual equipment.

Prerequisite
l

The NE must be created.

There must be idle slot on the NE Panel.

Context
The physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the subrack. A logical board refers to a
board that is created on the T2000. After a logical board is created, you can configure the relevant
services. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services can be available.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout.
Step 2 Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the drop-down list.
NOTE

Click Add Physical Boards. All the slots in which physical boards are configured, and the system
automatically creates corresponding logical boards.

----End

B.14.2 Deleting Boards


To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards
from the NE Panel.

Prerequisite
The fibers, trails, services and protection groups must be deleted.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-13

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout to select a subrack.
Step 2 Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
NOTE

Certain boards, such as PIU boards, cannot be deleted. The boards that can be deleted vary with different
types of equipment. For details, see the Hardware Description of each type of the equipment.

----End

B.15 Performance Management


To ensure the normal functioning of the network, the network management and maintenance
personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance
management measures.
B.15.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold
The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold.
According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board.
B.15.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board
You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The
T2000 monitors all the performance of the board, but the automatic reporting feature is disabled
by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.
B.15.3 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE
By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance
monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of
the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by
maintenance personnel.
B.15.4 Resetting Board Performance Registers
After a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset the
performance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.

B.15.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold


The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold.
According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a related board and choose Performance > Performance
Threshold.
Step 2 Set performance thresholds according to the requirement.
Step 3 Optional: Click Default to restore the default settings.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
B-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

B.15.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board


You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The
T2000 monitors all the performance of the board, but the automatic reporting feature is disabled
by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Performance Monitor Status
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select a condition from the Monitored Object Filter Condition drop-down list.
Step 3 Set the Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report and 24-Hour Auto-Report. Click Apply.
----End

B.15.3 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE


By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance
monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of
the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by
maintenance personnel.

Prerequisite
The NE time must be synchronized with the T2000 server time.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor
Time from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters according to the requirement. Click
Apply.
----End

B.15.4 Resetting Board Performance Registers


After a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset the
performance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance
Register from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the registers that you want to reset.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-15

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step 3 Click Reset and the confirmation dialog box is displayed.


Step 4 Click OK.
----End

B.16 Modifying the Services Configuration


After a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the service
based on the following task sets.
B.16.1 Deleting Cross-Connection Service
When you need to modify or re-configure cross-connections, you need to first delete them.
B.16.2 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service
The SNCP service has the dual and fed selective receiving function and is applicable to the
protection for the cross-subnet service. When configuring WDM services on a per-NE basis,
you can use this method to convert SNCP services that are already configured to non-protection
services.

B.16.1 Deleting Cross-Connection Service


When you need to modify or re-configure cross-connections, you need to first delete them.

Background Information

CAUTION
Deleting cross-connections may interrupt services.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection
Service Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Query to query the
information about the existing cross-connections.
B-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

Step 3 Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Delete.


Step 4 In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
----End

B.16.2 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service


The SNCP service has the dual and fed selective receiving function and is applicable to the
protection for the cross-subnet service. When configuring WDM services on a per-NE basis,
you can use this method to convert SNCP services that are already configured to non-protection
services.

Prerequisite
The SNCP service must be created.

Background Information
NOTE

Converting an SNCP service to a non-protection service may interrupt the service.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection
Service Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click Query to query services of
the NE.
Step 3 Right-click on the desired SNCP service and choose SNCP Working Service Convert to NonProtection Service from the shortcut menu. In the prompt dialog box displayed, click OK. The
protection service is deleted automatically.
NOTE

You can also choose SNCP Protection Service Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut
menu. In this case, the working service is deleted automatically.

Step 4 Right-click a unidirectional service from the service source board to the line board of another
direction, and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. In the Confirm dialog box , click OK.
Step 5 Optional: If there are intermediate NEs that protection service pass through, delete bidirectional
pass-through services between line boards.
NOTE

When choose SNCP Protection Service Convert to Non-Protection Service, you need to perform this
operation on all the intermediate NEs that normal services pass through.

----End

B.17 Switching the Working Mode of the LQM2


The default working mode of the LQM2 board is 2LQM Mode. When the working mode is
switched to AP8 Mode, you need to configure the board and add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface
according to this section.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-17

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
The physical and logical LQM2 board must be configured.

Background Information
This section describes how to configure the LQM2 board and add an optical interface when the
working mode of the board is switched from 2LQM Mode to AP8 Mode. When the working
mode of the board is switched from AP8 Mode to 2LQM Mode, the configuration of the board
is similar except that you do not need to add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete the cross-connections on the LQM2 board:
1.

In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Crossconnection Service Management from the Function Tree. Click Query. The Working
cross-connection field displays all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board.

2.

Select all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board, Click Delete. In the displayed
prompt dialog box, click OK.

Step 2 Delete the service type on the LQM2 board:


1.

In the NE Explorer, select the LQM2 board and then choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

On the right of the user interface, select By Board/Port (Channel), and select Channel
from the drop-down list. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Service Type of optical
interface 3 to optical interface 10 to None, and then click Apply.

3.

Click OK in the displayed dialog box.

Step 3 Change the working mode of the LQM2 board:


1.

Select By Function and then choose Board Mode from the drop-down menu.

2.

Set Board Mode to AP8 Mode, and then click Apply.

Step 4 Add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface of the LQM2 board:


B-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

1.

In the NE Explorer, right-click the LQM2 board and then choose Path View. The Path
View window is displayed.

2.

Right-click the blank space on the right of the Path View window, and then choose Add
Port.

3.

The Add Port dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

----End

B.18 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data


For the security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.
B.18.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods
You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCC
board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the DRDB
database of the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This section
describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method as
required.
B.18.2 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-19

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE
data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the Flash database on the SCC
board.
B.18.3 Restoring Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client
This topic describes how to restore the device data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client.

B.18.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods


You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCC
board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the DRDB
database of the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This section
describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method as
required.

Comparison of Backup and Restoration Methods


The locations for backing up and restoring the NE database include the SCC board, local server
and remote server. Different storage locations determine different types of backup and
restoration methods. See Table B-1.
Table B-1 Backup and restoration methods and application scenarios
Backup and Restoration Method

Application Scenario

Back up/Restore the NE database to/from an


SCC board

Backs up the NE data in the DRDB database


of the SCC board to the flash database, when
the SCC board does not have a CF card.
During the restoration, after a warm reset (or
cold reset) on the SCC board, the SCC board
reads the configuration from the DRDB (or
flash) database.
l after a warm reset on the SCC board, the
MDB reads the configuration from the
DRDB database.
l after a cold reset on the SCC board, the
MDB reads the configuration from the
FLASH database.

Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMS


server

Stores the data in the computer where the


NMS server resides.
During restoration, you can select the backup
file in the directory where the NE data is
saved.

Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMS


client

Stores the data in the computer where the


NMS client resides.
During restoration, you can select the backup
file in the directory where the NE data is
saved.

B-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

NOTE

After the warm resets on other boards, the NE memory data is issued to the boards. When the actual
configuration of the board is consistent with the configuration stored in the database for restoration, the
process of delivering configuration data to the board does not interrupt services.

NE Database
The NE configuration data is saved in the NE database. There are three types of NE databases
as follows:
l

MDB: Memory database. The data in a MDB database is changed when the configuration
information is changed. The data is lost when the SCC board is reset or a power failure
occurs.

DRDB: Dynamic random database. The data that is verified is automatically saved in the
DRDB database. The data is lost when a power failure occurs but not lost after a warm reset
is performed.

FDB: Flash database. There are the FDB0 and FDB1 databases. The data can be saved
permanently.

When the NE configuration data is issued to the SCC board, it is saved in the MDB database. If
the verification is successful, the SCC board automatically copies the contents in the MDB
database to the DRDB database and issues the verified configuration data to the boards. The
DRDB database is copied the DRDB database to the FDB database, as a backup of the DRDB
database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board checks whether there
is configuration data in the DRDB database. If yes, the data are restored from the DRDB
database. If the data in the DRDB database is damaged, the data is restored from the FDB0 and
FDB1 databases.

NE Configuration Data
The NE configuration data refers to the information in the DRDB database of the NE, such as
the board configuration, clock configuration and protection relations of the NE. It is the
instruction file of the NE and the key for the NE to perform normally in the entire network.

NE Database Package
The NE database package is a package that contains all database files on an NE and a file list
that defines and manages those files.
The NE database package and NE configuration data are the same data on the NE in different
releases. You can perform the NE database package backup and restoration on the release 5.00.06
NE or the NE of later release.

B.18.2 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board


When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE
data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the Flash database on the SCC
board.

Prerequisite
l

You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.

The NE data from DRDB database must be backed up to the flash database on the SCC
board.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-21

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Select Slot Layout in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Right-click the active SCC board, choose Warm Reset or Cold Reset.
NOTE

l The reset modes for different SCC board are different. You need to choose the reset mode as required.
l When you choose Cold Reset or Warm Reset, the Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK to
start the reset.

Step 3 A dialog box is displayed. Click OK to complete the reset.


----End

B.18.3 Restoring Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS
Client
This topic describes how to restore the device data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client.

Prerequisite
l

The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.

To restore the device data from the NMS client, the SFTP server must be configured, and
the SFTP service must be started.

Background Information
l

You cannot restore device data for multiple devices of different device types.

When you select the device type in the device tree, all the device information related to the
device type is displayed in the Device View table.

Procedure
Step 1 On the Main Topology, choose Data Center > Device Management from the main menu. The
Device View table is displayed.
Step 2 In the Device View table, right-click the device(s) whose data you want to restore.
Step 3 Select Recover... to open the Recover dialog box.
Step 4 Select the backup file to be restored from the File Name drop-down list. If the backup files are
not listed in the File Name drop-down list, select Browse... to select the backup file to be restored
in the Select File dialog box, as shown below.

B-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

Step 5 Select the NMS Server or NMS Client option button to restore the backup file for the selected
device(s). By default, the NMS Server option button is selected.
l If the NMS Server option button is selected, select the backup file to be restored from the
NMS Server. The selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File dialog box.
to select the backup file to be
l If the NMS Client option button is selected, click
restored from the NMS client. The selected backup file path is displayed in the following
Selected File dialog box.
Step 6 Click OK.
The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File
Name drop-down list.
Step 7 Click Start and the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click Yes to start the
restoration operation.
----End

Result
After you restore the device data, right-click the device in the Device View table, and choose
Activation Database... from the shortcut menu. The Activation Database dialog box is
displayed. Click Start to activate the device database.
NOTE

If you do not activate the software within five minutes after the restoration is successfully complete, the
T2000 automatically rolls back the software and cancels the restoration operation.

B.19 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode


In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside
NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-23

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few
fiber connections only.

Prerequisite
The board on relevant NEs must be created.
Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Configure Wavelength No./
Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designed wavelength.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Click Create, and the Create Fibers in Batches dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click Select Object, select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable in the dialog box.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Click New in the Create Fibers in Batches dialog box.
Step 6 Set Direction, Source NE, Source Port, Sink NE and Sink Port.

Step 7 Click Apply.


TIP

You can create multiple fibers/cables and set parameters in step 5, click Apply.

Step 8 Repeat Step 5-7 to create another fiber connection.


Step 9 Click Cancel to complete the settings. The created fiber connections are displayed in the Fiber/
Cable Information list.
----End

Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to scan wavelengths to ensure that the fiber
connections are correct and the line communication is available.

B.20 Configuring Services by Creating WDM Trails


You can configure services on NEs by creating OCh, ODUk, or client trails. To create an OCh,
ODUk, or client trail, you need to search for or create the information about the trail at the
B-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

corresponding server layer and then specify the source and sink of the OCh, ODUk, or client
trail.

Prerequisite
All fibers must be created properly.
A trail at the corresponding server layer must be searched out or created.
All the NEs on the trail must communicate with each other properly.

Tools, Meters, and Materials


The T2000 must be used.

Precautions
NOTE

Before creating a WDM trail, you need to search for or create a trail at the corresponding server layer. The
details are as follows:
l Before creating an OCh trail, you need to search for an appropriate trail at the OMS server layer.
l Before creating an ODUk trail, you need to search for an appropriate trail at the OTUk server layer.
l Before creating a client trail, you need to search for or create an appropriate trail at the OCh and ODUk
server layer.
NOTE

You can configure services by creating client trails for only boards that support the cross-connection
function.

Procedure
l

Operations on the T2000


For detailed description of searching for, creating, and managing WDM trails, see the online
help for the T2000.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

1.

In the Main Menu, choose Trail > WDM Trail Creation to display the WDM Trail
Creation navigation.

2.

Set Level, Rate, and Direction for the trail to be created.

3.

Click Browse. The Select Board Port-Source window is displayed. In this window,
select the NE, board, and optical interface.

4.

Optional: Click a server tail between the source and sink NEs. In the displayed dialog
box, specify a route as the explicit route for the services. You can click the route again
and cancel the selected explicit route in the displayed dialog box.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-25

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and


Configuration

5.

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Optional: Double-click another NE in the subnet to specify it as an excluded NE. The


sign is shown on the NE. Double-click the NE again to cancel your selection.

6.

Optional: Click Specify Route Channel to display the Specify Route Channel
dialog box. After selecting the working channel of the services, click OK.

7.

Click the General Attributes tab and then set the basic attributes such as name and
ID of this trail on the tab page.

8.

Select the Activate the trail check box and click Apply to create this trail. A dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

B-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

Service Configuration Examples

C.1 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service


This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the GE service
through configuration of the cross-connect service.
C.2 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services
This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SAN services through
an example.
C.3 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service
This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the OTN service
through configuration of the cross-connect service.
C.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services
This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SDH services through
an example.
C.5 Configuring the Hybrid Transmission of the GE/STM-1 Services in the Service Package
Mode
This example is used to describe how to configure the hybrid transmission of the GE/STM-1
services in the service package mode.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-1

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

C.1 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE


Service
This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the GE service
through configuration of the cross-connect service.
C.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram
This section describes how to configure the GE service in the ring network.
C.1.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation
This section describes how to configure the GE service transparent transmission signal flow and
how to plan the wavelength allocation.
C.1.3 Configuration Process (In the Service Package Mode)
The configuration in this example can be completed in a one-touch manner after the GE
transparent transmission service package is executed.
C.1.4 Configuration Process
This section describes how to configure the GE service on NEs A and B. This section describes
only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

C.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure the GE service in the ring network.

Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure C-1, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the
NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional GE service is available
between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-1 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service
User1

EAST
WEST

LQM2
LQM2

NMS

User2
EAST
WEST

LQM2
LQM2
:OADM

C-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

Board Configuration Information


In this example, two LQM2 boards should be configured on each NE.

C.1.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation


This section describes how to configure the GE service transparent transmission signal flow and
how to plan the wavelength allocation.
One GE service is available between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-2 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-2 Unidirectional service on each NE
B

A
3(RX1/TX1)

LQM2

LQM2

4(RX2/TX2)

3(RX1/TX1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

2(IN2/OUT2)
201(LP1/LP1)

4(RX2/TX2)

201(LP1/LP1)
1(IN1/OUT1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

: WDM-side services

: client-side services

: virtual channel

NOTE

The 201 (LP1/LP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no
configuration is required.

GE service of station A:
The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on
optical NE A and 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE A.

GE service of station B:
The service is dropped by using the 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical
NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE B.

Figure C-3 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B.


Figure C-3 Wavelength allocation diagram
Wavelength(nm)
/Frequency(THz)

A
East

B
West

1532.68/
195.60

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-3

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

C.1.3 Configuration Process (In the Service Package Mode)


The configuration in this example can be completed in a one-touch manner after the GE
transparent transmission service package is executed.

Background Information
When the service of another type needs to be added through any one of optical interfaces 3-6 of
the LQM2, re-configure the interface in the common mode; otherwise, the service is not
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the add services at station A
1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query.

3.

Select the GE bypass service package and click Start. Then, click OK in the displayed
dialog box. The GE bypass hybrid service package is configured on NE.

NOTE

Package ID: Each service package is assigned with one ID, which cannot be changed.
Description: Indicates the name of the service package.

Step 2 Configuring the drop services at station B


1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query.

3.

Select the GE bypass service package and click Start. Then, click OK in the displayed
dialog box. The GE bypass hybrid service package is configured on NE.

Step 3 Optional: Refer to Adding WDM-Side Ports to add optical interface 2.


Step 4 Optional: Check the related parameters after the service package is configured.

C-4

1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service


Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query to query the configured services.

3.

Select the LQM2 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function
Tree. Click Query. Then, the system indicates that Service Type of optical interfaces 3
and 4 of the LQM2 board is GE.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

4.

Click the Advanced Attributes tab and then click Query. The system indicates that AutoNegotiation of GE is set to Disabled.

5.

Select By Function and click Query. The system indicates that LPT Enabled is set to
Disabled.

NOTE

If the LQM2 board mode is "2LQM", it will turn into "AP8" mode automatically after configuring service
package.

----End

C.1.4 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure the GE service on NEs A and B. This section describes
only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Precautions

CAUTION
When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number
used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction.
Otherwise, the service cannot be available.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-5

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

Procedure
Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM
interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see Configuring the Service Type.
Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A.
1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service


Management in the Function Tree.

2.

In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.

3.

In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service
Level, and Service Type according to the planning.

4.

Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.

Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B.

C-6

1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service


Management in the Function Tree.

2.

In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.

3.

In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service
Level, and Service Type according to the planning.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4.

C Service Configuration Examples

Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.

----End

C.2 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN


Services
This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SAN services through
an example.
C.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram
This section describes how to configure the SAN service in the ring network.
C.2.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation
This section describes how to configure the SAN service transparent transmission signal flow
and how to plan the wavelength allocation.
C.2.3 Configuration Process
This section describes how to configure the SAN service on NEs A and B. This section describes
only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

C.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure the SAN service in the ring network.

Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure C-4, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the
NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional SAN service is available
between NE A and NE B.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-7

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

Figure C-4 Configuration networking diagram of the SAN service


User1

EAST
WEST

LQM2
LQM2

NMS
A

User2
EAST
WEST

LQM2
LQM2
:OADM

Board Configuration Information


In this example, two LQM2 boards should be configured on each NE.

C.2.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation


This section describes how to configure the SAN service transparent transmission signal flow
and how to plan the wavelength allocation.
One SAN service is available between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-5 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-5 Unidirectional service on each NE
B

A
3(RX1/TX1)

LQM2

LQM2
2(IN2/OUT2)

4(RX2/TX2)

201(LP1/LP1)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)

: client-side services

1(IN1/OUT1)

3(RX1/TX1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

4(RX2/TX2)

201(LP1/LP1)
1(IN1/OUT1)

: WDM-side services

7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)

: virtual channel

NOTE

The 201 (LP1/LP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no
configuration is required.

C-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

SAN service of station A:


The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on
optical NE A and 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE A.

SAN service of station B:


The service is dropped by using the 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical
NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE B.

Figure C-6 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B.


Figure C-6 Wavelength allocation diagram
Wavelength(nm)
/Frequency(THz)

A
East

B
West

1532.68/
195.60

C.2.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure the SAN service on NEs A and B. This section describes
only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Precautions

CAUTION
When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number
used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction.
Otherwise, the service cannot be available.

Procedure
Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM
interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see Configuring the Service Type.
Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A.
1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service


Management in the Function Tree.

2.

In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.

3.

In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service
Level, and Service Type according to the planning.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-9

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

4.

Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.

Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B.


1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service


Management in the Function Tree.

2.

In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.

3.

In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service
Level, and Service Type according to the planning.

4.

Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.

----End

C-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

C.3 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN


Service
This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the OTN service
through configuration of the cross-connect service.
C.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram
This section describes how to configure the OTN service in the ring network.
C.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation
This section describes how to configure the OTN service transparent transmission signal flow
and how to plan the wavelength allocation.
C.3.3 Configuration Process
This section describes how to configure the OTN service on NEs A and B. This section describes
only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

C.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure the OTN service in the ring network.

Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure C-7, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the
NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional OTN service is available
between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-7 Configuration networking diagram of the OTN service
User1

EAST
WEST

LQM2
LQM2

NMS

User2
EAST
WEST

LQM2
LQM2
:OADM

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-11

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

Board Configuration Information


In this example, two LQM2 boards should be configured on each NE.

C.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation


This section describes how to configure the OTN service transparent transmission signal flow
and how to plan the wavelength allocation.
One OTN service is available between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-8 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-8 Unidirectional service on each NE
B

A
3(RX1/TX1)

LQM2

LQM2

4(RX2/TX2)

201(LP1/LP1)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)

3(RX1/TX1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

2(IN2/OUT2)

4(RX2/TX2)

201(LP1/LP1)
1(IN1/OUT1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

: WDM-side services

: client-side services

7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)

: virtual channel

NOTE

The 201 (LP1/LP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no
configuration is required.

OTN service of station A:


The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on
optical NE A and 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE A.

OTN service of station B:


The service is dropped by using the 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical
NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE B.

Figure C-9 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B.


Figure C-9 Wavelength allocation diagram
Wavelength(nm)
/Frequency(THz)

A
East

B
West

1532.68/
195.60

C-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

C.3.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure the OTN service on NEs A and B. This section describes
only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Precautions

CAUTION
When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number
used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction.
Otherwise, the service cannot be available.

Procedure
Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM
interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see Configuring the Service Type.
Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A.
1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service


Management in the Function Tree.

2.

In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.

3.

In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service
Level, and Service Type according to the planning.

4.

Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.

Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B.


1.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service


Management in the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-13

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

2.

In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.

3.

In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service
Level, and Service Type according to the planning.

4.

Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.

----End

C.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH


Services
This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SDH services through
an example.
C.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram
This section describes how to configure the SDH service in the ring network.
C.4.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation
This section describes how to configure the SDH service transparent transmission signal flow
and how to plan the wavelength allocation.
C.4.3 Configuration Process
This section describes how to configure the SDH service on NEs A and B. This section describes
only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

C.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure the SDH service in the ring network.

Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure C-10, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the
NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:
C-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional SDH service is available
between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-10 Configuration networking diagram of the SDH service
User1

EAST
WEST

LQM2
LQM2

NMS
A

User2
EAST
WEST

LQM2
LQM2
:OADM

Board Configuration Information


In this example, two LQM2 boards should be configured on each NE.

C.4.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation


This section describes how to configure the SDH service transparent transmission signal flow
and how to plan the wavelength allocation.
One SDH service is available between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-11 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-11 Unidirectional service on each NE
B

A
3(RX1/TX1)

LQM2

LQM2
2(IN2/OUT2)

4(RX2/TX2)

201(LP1/LP1)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)

: client-side services

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

1(IN1/OUT1)

3(RX1/TX1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

4(RX2/TX2)

201(LP1/LP1)
1(IN1/OUT1)

: WDM-side services

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)

: virtual channel
C-15

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples


NOTE

The 201 (LP1/LP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no
configuration is required.

SDH service of station A:


The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on
optical NE A and 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE A.

SDH service of station B:


The service is dropped by using the 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical
NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE B.

Figure C-12 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B.


Figure C-12 Wavelength allocation diagram
Wavelength(nm)
/Frequency(THz)

A
East

B
West

1532.68/
195.60

C.4.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure the SDH service on NEs A and B. This section describes
only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Precautions

CAUTION
When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number
used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction.
Otherwise, the service cannot be available.

Procedure
Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM
interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see Configuring the Service Type.
Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A.

C-16

1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service


Management in the Function Tree.

2.

In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

3.

In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service
Level, and Service Type according to the planning.

4.

Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.

Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B.


1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service


Management in the Function Tree.

2.

In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.

3.

In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service
Level, and Service Type according to the planning.

4.

Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.

----End

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-17

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

C.5 Configuring the Hybrid Transmission of the GE/STM-1


Services in the Service Package Mode
This example is used to describe how to configure the hybrid transmission of the GE/STM-1
services in the service package mode.
C.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram
This section describes how to configure the GE service and STM-1 service in the ring network.
C.5.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation
This section describes how to configure the GE service and STM-1 service transparent
transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation.
C.5.3 Configuration Process
The configuration in this example can be completed in a one-touch manner after the GE/STM-1
hybrid transmission service package is executed.

C.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure the GE service and STM-1 service in the ring network.

Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure C-13, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the
NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional GE service and STM-1
service is available between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-13 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service and STM-1 service
User1

EAST
WEST

LQM2
LQM2

NMS

User2
EAST
WEST

LQM2
LQM2
:OADM

C-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

Board Configuration Information


In this example, two LQM2 boards should be configured on each NE.

C.5.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation


This section describes how to configure the GE service and STM-1 service transparent
transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation.
GE service and STM-1 service is available between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-14 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B.
Figure C-14 Unidirectional service on each NE

GE
GE
STM-1
STM-1

3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)

LQM2
201(LP1/LP1)-1
201(LP1/LP1)-2

LQM2
201(LP1/LP1)-1
201(LP1/LP1)-2

1(IN1/OUT1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

2(IN2/OUT2)

: client-side services

GE
3(RX1/TX1)
GE
4(RX2/TX2)
STM-1
5(RX3/TX3)
STM-1
6(RX4/TX4)

: WDM-side services

: virtual channel

NOTE

The 201 (LP1/LP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no
configuration is required.

GE service and STM-1 service of station A:


The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on
optical NE A and 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE A.

GE service and STM-1 service of station B:


The service is dropped by using the 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical
NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE B.

Figure C-15 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B.


Figure C-15 Wavelength allocation diagram
Wavelength(nm)
/Frequency(THz)

A
East

B
West

1531.90/
195.70
1532.68/
195.60
1533.47/
195.50
1535.82/
195.20

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-19

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

C.5.3 Configuration Process


The configuration in this example can be completed in a one-touch manner after the GE/STM-1
hybrid transmission service package is executed.

Background Information
When the service of another type needs to be added through any one of optical interfaces 3-6 of
the LQM2, re-configure the interface in the common mode; otherwise, the service is not
available.

Precautions

CAUTION
When the service package is started, the configuration that supported service package boards on
the NE is cleared first and then the service package is started.

Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the add services at station A
1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query. Then, click Close on the Operation Result dialog box.

3.

Select the GE/STM1 hybrid service package and click Start. Then, click OK on the
Confirm dialog box. Then, the GE/STM1 hybrid service package is configured on NE.

NOTE

Package ID: Each service package is assigned with one ID, which cannot be changed.
Package Type: Indicates the type of the service package.

Step 2 Configuring the drop services at station B


1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query. Then, click Close on the Operation Result dialog box.

3.

Select the GE/STM1 hybrid service package and click Start. Then, click OK on the
Confirmdialog box. Then, the GE/STM1 hybrid service package is configured on NE.

Step 3 Optional: Refer to Adding WDM-Side Ports to add optical interface 2.


Step 4 Optional: Check the related parameters after the service package is configured.

C-20

1.

Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service


Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query to query the configured services.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

C Service Configuration Examples

3.

Select the LQM2 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function
Tree. Click Query. Then, the system indicates that Service Type of optical interfaces 3
and 4 of the LQM2 board is GE, and the Service Type of optical interfaces 5 and 6 of the
LQM2 board is STM-1.

4.

Click the Advanced Attributes tab and then click Query. The system indicates that AutoNegotiation of GE is set to Disabled.

5.

Select By Function and click Query. The system indicates that LPT Enabled is set to
Disabled.

NOTE

If the LQM2 board mode is "2LQM", it will turn into "AP8" mode automatically after configuring service
package.

----End

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-21

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Parameter Reference

D.1 Attributes of NEs


In this user interface, you can view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, and
IP address.
D.2 Attributes of NE Users
In this user interface, you can manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, delete
and modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.
D.3 NE Time Synchronization
In this user interface, you can set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the T2000 server time.
D.4 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration
In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.
D.5 Port Protection Parameters
In this user interface, you can create, configure and modify the port protection group. Port
protection is used to switch the service to the protection port when the working port becomes
faulty. It ensures service availability. A working port and the corresponding protection port are
regarded as a port protection group.
D.6 SNCP Service Control Parameters
In this user interface, you can query and modify the attributes and status of an SNCP service.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-1

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

D.1 Attributes of NEs


In this user interface, you can view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, and
IP address.

Parameters
Field

Value

Description

NE ID

1 to 49135

Displays the unique ID of an


NE on the NM for identifying
an NE, which is the basis of
communication between the
NM and an NE.

Extended ID

1 to 254

For NE ID extension.

Default: 9
Gateway Type

IP Gateway, Serial Port

The gateway type of an NE


decides the mode of
communication between the
NE and the NM.

User Name

For example: root

The NE name is used when


logging in to the NE. Before
the NE is configured, use the
internally reserved user name
for login.

Password

For example: T2000

Corresponds to the above NE


user password. The
corresponding password for
the reserved user is
password.

D.2 Attributes of NE Users


In this user interface, you can manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, delete
and modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.

Parameters
Table D-1 NE user parameters

D-2

Field

Value

Description

NE

For example: NE70

The operation object


selected.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

NE User

For example: USER

The name of the NE user. The


name consists of 4-16
characters. It can be a
combination of letters, digits,
spaces and underlines. Note
that at least one letter must be
included.

User Level

Monitor level, Operation


level, Maintenance level,
System level, Debug level.

The operations carried out by


the NE user are classified into
five levels, namely monitor
level, operation level,
maintenance level, system
level, debug level from the
lowest level to the highest.
Each user of higher level can
perform all the functions that
a lower level user can do. The
detailed right settings for
each level are:
l Monitor level: all query
commands, log in/out,
and modification of its
own password.
l Operation level: all
settings for fault and
performance, partial
security settings, and
partial configuration.
l Maintenance level:
partial security settings,
partial configuration,
communication settings,
and log management.
l System level: all security
settings, all
configuration.
l Debug level: all security
settings, all
configuration, and all
debug commands. Debug
level is the highest level.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-3

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

New Password

New password of the user.


The password consists of
6-16 characters. It can be a
combination of English
characters, digits, space and
underlines. Note that the
password cannot be
composed all by digits or all
by letters. It cannot contain
special characters.

Confirm Password

The new password of the user


that you need to enter again.

User Group Belonged

For example: Administrator


User Group

Displays the belonged user


group name.

Login Allowed

Yes, No

Sets whether the NE user is


allowed to log in.

Permanently Valid or not

Yes, No

Sets whether the NE user is


permanently valid or not.

Valid From

For example: 2005-05-07


10:18:07

The start time of user


validity.

Valid Till

For example: 2005-05-07


10:18:07

The expiration time of user


validity.

Whether the password is


allowed to be modified
immediately

Yes, No

Sets whether the password is


allowed to be modified
immediately.

Records of all Logins

Yes, No

Sets whether the NE user is


valid permanently.

Allowable Login Start Date

For example: Sunday

Sets the allowable login start


date. The parameter is valid
when Records of all Logins
is set to No.

Allowable Login Start Time

For example: 00:00:00

Time format is hour: min:


second.
Sets the allowable login start
time. The parameter is valid
when Records of all Logins
is set to No.

Allowable Login End Date

D-4

For example: Saturday

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Sets the allowable login end


time. The parameter is valid
when Records of all Logins
is set to No.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

Allowable Login End Time

For example: 23:59:59

Time format is hour: min:


second.
Sets the allowable login end
time. The parameter is valid
when Records of all Logins
is set to No.

Time to Lock User for No


Activities (Day)

0-255

Sets the time to lock the NE


user for no activities.

Maximum Password
Validity (Day)

25-999

Sets the maximum password


validity.

Password Modification Time

For example: 2007-01-23


10:28:26

Displays the password


modification time.

Last Login Time

For example: 2007-01-23


10:28:00

Displays the last login time of


the NE user.

D.3 NE Time Synchronization


In this user interface, you can set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the T2000 server time.

Parameters

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Field

Value

Description

NM Time

For example:
2006-11-04 20:30:00

Displays the time of the


T2000 server in real
time.

NE Name

For example: NE1

Displays the name of the


NE.

NE ID

Format: Extended ID-ID

Displays the ID of the


NE.

Synchronous Mode

NM, NULL

Displays the
synchronization mode of
NE Time.

Standard NTP Authentication

Enabled, Disabled

Displays or sets whether


the standard NTP
authentication is
enabled.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-5

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

Server Enabled

ECC Server, Disabled

Displays or sets whether


to set it to the NTP server
and the type of the NTP
server.
When the ECC protocol
is used for
communication between
NEs, the gateway NE is
an ECC server. So, the
Server Enabled
parameter is set to ECC
Server. While nongateway NEs are ECC
clients and the Server
Enabled parameter is set
to Disabled.
When the IP protocol is
used for communication
between NEs, all NEs
are IP clients and the
Server Enabled
parameter is set to
Disabled.
OptiX OSN 1800 series
do not support.

Client Enabled

ECC Client, IP Client,


Disabled

Displays or sets whether


to set it to the NTP client
and the type of the NTP
client.
When the IP protocol is
used for communication
between the NE and the
NTP server, the NE is an
IP client and the Client
Enabled parameter are
set to IP Client.
OptiX OSN 1800 series
do not support.

D-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

Synchronous Server

NE ID, IP address

Displays or sets the IP


address or NE ID of the
NTP synchronous
server.
If the client type is ECC
Client, set it to the NE ID
of the synchronous
server.
If the client type is IP
Client, set it to the IP
address of the
synchronous server.
OptiX OSN 1800 series
do not support.

Polling Period(min)

2 to 1440 Minutes

Displays the period of


synchronizing the NE
time with the NTP server
time.
OptiX OSN 1800 series
do not support.

The Number of Sampling

1 to 8

It indicates how many


times the NTP server
time will be sampled in a
querying cycle. The NTP
server time is the average
of that sampled.
OptiX OSN 1800 series
do not support.

NE Current Time

For example:
2006-11-04 20:30:00

Displays the current time


of the NE.

Recent NE Synchronization Time

For example:
2006-11-04 20:30:00

The latest time when the


NE was synchronized.
If the difference between
the current NE time and
the latest time when the
NE was synchronized is
within two querying
cycles, it indicates the
NTP server is running
normally. Otherwise, it
indicates the NTP server
is not running normally,
and the color of the
parameter box will
change to the one that is
for "Major Alarm".

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-7

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field
Synchronization
Starting Time

Synchronizati
on Starting
Time

Value

Description

For example:
2006-11-04 20:30:00

Sets the start time of


synchronizing the NE
time with the NM time.
Applied only when the
NE time is synchronized
with the NM time.

Synchronizati
on Period
(days)

1 to 300

Sets the cycle of


automatically
synchronizing the NE
time with the NM time.

Default: 1

Applied only when the


NE time is synchronized
with the NM time.

D.4 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration


In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

Parameters
Table D-2 Descriptions of the WDM service parameters

D-8

Field

Value

Remarks

Level

GE, Any, ODU1

Determines the service rate.

Service Type

For example, FE,


STM-1, FICON

When Level of a new service is set to


Any, you can select a specific service type.

Direction

Unidirectional,
Bidirectional

In the case of a bidirectional service, the


service takes the same route in the transmit
and receive directions. In the case of a
unidirectional service, the service takes
different routes in the transmit and receive
directions.

Source Slot

Slot-board name

When you create a service, select a source


board for the service.

Source Optical Port

Port number (port


name)

When you create a service, select a source


port for the service.

Source Optical
Channel

Channel ID

When you create a service, select a source


channel for the service.

Sink Slot

Slot-board name

When you create a service, select a sink


board for the service.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Remarks

Sink Optical Port

Port number (port


name)

When you create a service, select a sink


port for the service.

Sink Optical Channel

Channel ID

When you create a service, select a sink


channel for the service.

Source Channel

Slot No.-board nameoptical interface No.channel ID

Displays the source channel of the service


after the creation is complete.

For example, 3LQM2-3(RX1/


TX1)-1
Sink Channel

Slot No.-board nameoptical interface No.channel ID

Displays the source channel of the service


after the creation is complete.

For example, 3LQM2-201(LP1/


LP1)-1

D.5 Port Protection Parameters


In this user interface, you can create, configure and modify the port protection group. Port
protection is used to switch the service to the protection port when the working port becomes
faulty. It ensures service availability. A working port and the corresponding protection port are
regarded as a port protection group.

Parameters
Table D-3 Protection Group Parameters

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Field

Value

Description

Protection Group Name

For example: NE811-52910

Displays the protection group


name.

Protection Type

Optical Line Protection,


Intra-Board 1+1 Protection,
Client 1+1 Protection, InterSubrack 1+1 Optical Channel
Protection

Displays the protection type


of the protection group.

NE with Working Channel

For example: NE811

Sets the NE of the working


channel.

Board with Working Channel

For example: 134-12OLP

Sets the board of the working


channel.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-9

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

Working Channel

For example: 1(RI1/TO1)

Sets and queries the working


channel.

NE with Protection Channel

For example: NE811

Sets the NE of the protection


channel.

Board with Protection


Channel

For example: 134-12OLP

Sets the board of the


protection channel.

Protection Channel

For example: 2(RI2/TO2)

Sets and queries the


protection channel.

NE with Control Channel/


Monitoring Channel

For example: NE811

Sets the NE of the control


channel/monitoring channel.

Board with Control Channel/


Monitoring Channel

For example: 134-12OLP

Sets the board of the control


channel/monitoring channel.

Restore Mode

Revertive, Non-Revertive

Indicates whether the service


is automatically switched
from the protection channel
to the working channel after
the working channel
becomes normal.

Default: Non-Revertive

Revertive means that the


service can be automatically
switched. Non-Revertive
means that the service is not
switched to the working
channel after the working
channel becomes normal.
NOTE
In the case of the intra-board 1
+1 protection configured by
using the OLP board, when the
Monitoring Channel is
configured, Revertive Mode
can be only Non-revertive and
cannot be configured.

WTR Time (s)

300-720
Default: 600

D-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The WTR time (s) parameter


indicates the waiting time
before the services in the
protection group switch back
to the working channel if the
working channel is recovered
when the protection group
works in the revertive mode.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

SD Trigger Flag

Enable, Disable

The SD Trigger Flag


parameter determines if the
SD switching function of the
wavelength protection group
takes effect.

Default: Disable

Switching Status

Idle, WTR, Manual to


Working channel, Manual to
Protection channel, Force to
Working channel, Force to
Protection channel, SD
Switched, SF Switched,
Locked, Unknown

Displays the current


switching status of the
protection group.

Table D-4 Channel Status Parameters

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Field

Value

Description

Protection Group Name

For example: NE811-52910

Displays the protection


group name.

Current Channel

Work, Protection, Unknown

Displays the path of the


current service.

Working Channel

NE name- Slot No.- Board


name- Optical interface
number (Optical interface
name)

Displays the working


channel of the protection
group.

Working Channel Status

Normal, SD, SF, Unknown

Displays the status of the


working channel.

Working Channel Hold-Off


Time

0-100

The Working Channel


Hold-Off Time (100ms)
parameter specifies the time
period from the time that the
system detects the switching
condition in the working
channel to the time that the
switching is performed. This
is to prevent protection
switching from being
performed repeatedly when
the service state is unstable.

Control Channel/Monitoring
Channel

NE name- Slot No.- Board


name- Optical interface
number (Optical interface
name)

Default: 0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Displays the channel


information of the Control
Channel/Monitoring
Channel.

D-11

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

Control Channel/Monitoring
Channel Hold-Off Time (100
ms)

0 to 100

Displays the hold-off time of


the control board.

Protection Channel

NE name- Slot No.- Board


name- Optical interface
number (Optical interface
name)

Displays the protection


channel of the protection
group.

Protection Channel Status

Normal, SD, SF, Unknown

Displays the status of the


protection channel.

Protection Channel Hold-Off


Time

0-100

The Protection Channel


Hold-Off Time (100ms)
parameter specifies the time
period from the time that the
system detects the switching
condition in the protection
channel to the time that the
switching is performed.

NOTE
This parameter can not be set in
optical line protection.

Default: 0

D.6 SNCP Service Control Parameters


In this user interface, you can query and modify the attributes and status of an SNCP service.

Parameters

D-12

Field

Value

Description

Service Source

Source Slot Number-Source


Board Name-Source Port
Number-Source Optical
Channel Number

Displays the source optical


channel of the service.

Service Sink

Sink Slot Number-Sink


Board Name-Sink Port
Number-Sink Optical
Channel Number

Displays the sink optical


channel of the service.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

Protection Type

SW SNCP, ODUk SNCP,


MS SNCP

The Protection Type


parameter provides users an
option for choosing a
required level for the newly
created SNCP protection.
The ODUk SNCP protection
and SW SNCP protection
protect services of different
cross-connect granularities,
which are ODUk and GE/
ANY respectively. If the
protection type is changed,
the relevant parameters must
also be changed accordingly.

Default: SW SNCP

NOTE
OptiX OSN 1800 series support
SW SNCP protection type only.

Service Type

For example: GE

Sets the service type of the


SNCP.

SNCP Type

SNC/I, SNC/S, SNC/N

The SNCP Type parameter


specifies the monitoring
mode of the ODUk SNCP
protection.

Default: SNC/I

NOTE
When you select Protection
Type as ODUK SNCP, you can
set this parameter.

OTN Level

l When SNCP Type is set


to SNC/I, this parameter
is invalid
l When SNCP Type is set
to SNC/N: PM, TCM1,
TCM2, TCM3, TCM4,
TCM5, TCM6.
Default: PM

Sets the OTN level.


NOTE
When you select SNCP Type is
SNC/N or SNC/S, you can set
this parameter.

l When SNCP Type is set


to SNC/S: TCM1, TCM2,
TCM3, TCM4, TCM5,
TCM6.
Default: TCM1

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-13

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

Current Status

Normal State, WTR State,


Manual (from Protection to
Working) Switching State,
Manual (from Working to
Protection) Switching State,
Forced (from Protection to
Working) Switching State,
Forced (from Working to
Protection) Switching State,
SD Switching, SF Switching,
Lockout

The Current Status


parameter displays the
switching status of a
protection group.

Default: None
Revertive Mode

Revertive, Non-Revertive
Default: Non-Revertive

WTR Time (s)

300-720
Default: 600

Working Channel Hold-Off


Time

D-14

0-100
Default: 0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The Revertive Mode


parameter provides users
with an option for whether to
switch back the services to
the working channel from the
protection channel
automatically after the
working channel is
recovered.
The WTR time (s) parameter
indicates the waiting time
before the services in the
protection group switch back
to the working channel if the
working channel is recovered
when the protection group
works in the revertive mode.
The Working Channel
Hold-Off Time (100ms)
parameter specifies the time
period from the time that the
system detects the switching
condition in the working
channel to the time that the
switching is performed. This
is to prevent protection
switching from being
performed repeatedly when
the service state is unstable.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

D Parameter Reference

Field

Value

Description

Protection Channel Hold-Off


Time

0-100

The Protection Channel


Hold-Off Time (100ms)
parameter specifies the time
period from the time that the
system detects the switching
condition in the protection
channel to the time that the
switching is performed.

SD Enable Status

Enabled, Disabled

Default: 0

Sets the SD enabling status.

Default: Disabled
Channel Status

Normal, SF, SD, Unknown

Displays the status of the


working service or the
protection service in a
protection group.

Current Channel

Working Channel, Protection


Channel, Delay Start

The Current Channel


parameter indicates the type
of the channel where the
service is currently located in
the SNCP protection group.

Default: /

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

D-15

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN


for Deployment On Site

Using the Commissioning Tool of the

Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site

E.1 Connecting the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool


Before logging in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool, perform a test to check whether
the connection between the computer and the NE is established. This is to ensure that the data
configuration and other commissioning operations can be performed successfully by using the
OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool.
E.2 Logging in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool
Users can log in to either the English version or the Chinese version of the OTN Deployment
Commissioning Tool by using the default user name and password.
E.3 Checking the Self-Check Report of the Equipment
Before the software commissioning is performed, check the ATN self-check report to determine
and then rectify the faults in hardware and software. This improves the commissioning
efficiency.
E.4 Setting NE Attributes
The NE attributes need to be set during the software deployment to ensure that the system can
manage the NEs.
E.5 Checking and Adjusting the Optical Power
Users can query the running status and optical power of each optical interface of a board to check
whether the optical power meets the communication requirement. In addition, users can adjust
the optical power by increasing or decreasing the attenuation of the attenuator attached to the
optical interface.
E.6 Configuring ECC
The ECC is used to realize delivery of ECC packets through the Ethernet port on the SCC. This
is to ensure the normal communication between NEs.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-1

E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN


for Deployment On Site

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

E.1 Connecting the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool


Before logging in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool, perform a test to check whether
the connection between the computer and the NE is established. This is to ensure that the data
configuration and other commissioning operations can be performed successfully by using the
OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool.

Background Information
If the IP address of the equipment cannot be obtained, press the LAMP button on the SCC board
to restore the default IP address of the OptiX OSN 1800. Then, connect the equipment to the
OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool for commissioning.
Method for restoring the default IP address:
Press the LAMP button on the SCC board and hold it for five to ten seconds. Then, release the
button and wait for five to ten seconds.
Press the button again and hold it for five to ten seconds. Then, release the button and wait for
five to ten seconds.
Press the button for the third time and hold it for more than five seconds, and then release the
button.
In this manner, the IP address of the equipment can be restored.
NOTE

The default IP address is 129.9.191.240.

Precautions

CAUTION
In the case of direct connection, do not configure a gateway if you configure IP Address (I).
Otherwise, any error in configuring the gateway may incur a connection failure. If the PC is
equipped with multiple network adapters, adopt the local connection corresponding to the
network adapter connected to the chassis.
NOTE

You can connect the PC to the Optix OSN 1800 series in the following ways:
l Direction connection
l Connection through a LAN
The following procedures for connecting the PC to the NE are based on the Windows XP operating system.

Procedure
l

Direction connection
1.

E-2

Connect the network interface of the PC to the ETH1 or ETH2&OAM network


interface on the front panel of the SCC housed in the Optix OSN 1800 series chassis.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN


for Deployment On Site

2.

Click Start and choose Settings > Control Panel to display the Control Panel
window.

3.

Double-click Network Connection to display the Network Connection window.

4.

Right-click Local Connection and select Properties to display the Local Connection
Properties window.

5.

Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties to display the Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.

6.

Select Use the following IP address. In the IP Address (I) field, enter an IP address
in the same network section as that of the NE, such as 129.9.0.N. "N" ranges from 1
to 255, but must be different from that in the IP address of the NE. In the Subnet
Mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.

7.

Click OK to finish the setting.

Connection through a LAN


1.

When you connect the PC to the NE through a LAN, set the IP address in the same
way as you set it for the direction connection scenario.

2.

The IP address of the Optix OSN 1800 series must be in the same network section as
that of the LAN.

3.

Connect the NE to a hub, router, or Ethernet switch through a network cable.

----End

E.2 Logging in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning


Tool
Users can log in to either the English version or the Chinese version of the OTN Deployment
Commissioning Tool by using the default user name and password.

Prerequisite
Call off the IE proxy.
Set the internet security level of IE to low.

Precautions
NOTE

l For the sake of security, the system automatically exits after a period of inactivity. To operate the OTN
Deployment Commissioning Tool, you need to log in again.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-3

E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN


for Deployment On Site

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Start Internet Explorer.
Step 2 In the address bar, enter the IP address of the OptiX OSN 1800 NE. For example, enter 129.9.0.9.

NOTE

By default, the login user interface language is English. You can click Chinese or English to choose a
language after logging in the tool.

Step 3 Enter a valid user name and password.


NOTE

user is "lct" and the password is "password".

Step 4 Press Enter or click Login.


----End

E.3 Checking the Self-Check Report of the Equipment


Before the software commissioning is performed, check the ATN self-check report to determine
and then rectify the faults in hardware and software. This improves the commissioning
efficiency.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool. Enter a valid user name and password.
Then, the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool automatically queries the power-on self-check
report of the equipment that is stored in the Flash of the SCC board.
NOTE

l After the equipment is powered on, the equipment itself checks the equipment type, basic information
of the NEs, the position information of every board, and the connecting status between the Local Bus
and the chip of the board.
l In the slot assignment diagram, green indicates that the board is installed, and yellow indicates that the
board is not installed.

Step 2 In the Tree View, choose Homepage and query the self-check result. The self-check result is
displayed on the interface of the Web commissioning tool in lists.

E-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN


for Deployment On Site

Step 3 Click Print to save the self-check result. Click Refresh to perform the operation again.
----End

E.4 Setting NE Attributes


The NE attributes need to be set during the software deployment to ensure that the system can
manage the NEs.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Tree View, choose NE Commissioning > NE Attributes, the NE Attributes interface
is displayed in the operation area.

Step 2 Click Refresh to view the basic attributes of the current NE.
Step 3 Change the values of NE Name, NE IP, NE Submask, and NE Time(UTC) according to actual
requirements.
NOTE

The value of NE Name consists of a maximum of 64 characters.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-5

E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN


for Deployment On Site

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step 4 Click Apply to activate the configuration. Then, a prompt information is displayed.
NOTE

After modifying the IP, re-log the NE.


If the IP subnet segment of the computer is not as same as the NE IP subnet segment, you should set a new IP
address for the computer. Ensure that it is in the same IP subnet segment as the NE IP, then re-log the NE.

Step 5 Modify the NE ID.


1.

Click Modify ID.

2.

Input new ID in the Modify NEID dialog box and then click Apply.
The value of the ID is in hexadecimal.

3.

Click Close to return to the login interface.

4.

Log in to the NE again.

----End

E.5 Checking and Adjusting the Optical Power


Users can query the running status and optical power of each optical interface of a board to check
whether the optical power meets the communication requirement. In addition, users can adjust
the optical power by increasing or decreasing the attenuation of the attenuator attached to the
optical interface.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Tree View, chooseNE Commissioning > Optical power detecting, Select the detection
object interface displayed in the operation area.

E-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN


for Deployment On Site

NOTE

l The Power (dBm) parameter indicates the current optical power of the optical interface of the board. The
Suggestion Range of Power(dBm) parameter indicates the the suggested optical power for the optical
interface.
l When specific values are displayed for Power (dBm) and Suggestion Range of Power(dBm), it indicates
that the board is in service; if - is displayed, it indicates that the board is not installed.

Step 2 Select the optical interface of a board you want to set from the Select check box.
NOTE

To select all boards or deselect all boards, click Select All or Unselect All.

Step 3 ClickAdd Board or Delete Board to add or delete a logical board.


NOTE

This step is only applicable to optical power detection, and the physical board to be added must have optical
interfaces.

Step 4 Click Start detecting and the optical power detection is performed on the selected board. After
the optical power of a certain interface is queried out, the value is compared with the threshold.
If the optical power is within Suggestion Range of Power(dBm), The Abnormity Type of
Optical Power and Handling Suggestions and Measures columns list the details.
Step 5 Clickprint to print out the detection result. The maintenance engineer adjusts the optical power
according to the detection result.
----End

E.6 Configuring ECC


The ECC is used to realize delivery of ECC packets through the Ethernet port on the SCC. This
is to ensure the normal communication between NEs.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Tree View, choose ECC Configure, the ECC Configure interface is displayed in the
operation area.
NOTE

The default tab for Extend Mode of ECC is Auto Configure.

Step 2 Choose Auto Configure, Manual Configure of Client, or Manual Configure of Server to set
the ECC parameters according to the actual situation. The detailed procedure is as follows:
1.

When Extend Mode of ECC is set to Auto Configure, you can set Auto Configure
Switch, which defaults to open. ClickApply to finish the configuration or clickQuery to
display the current configuration.

2.

When Extend Mode of ECC is set to Manual Configure of Client, IP and Port can be
set. The IP and port of the client must be consistent with the NE IP and port of the server.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E-7

E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN


for Deployment On Site

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

ClickApply to finish the configuration, clickQuery to display the current configuration, or


click delete to delete the configuration.

3.

When Extend Mode of ECC is set to Manual Configure of Server, IP cannot be modified.
Only Port can be set.

NOTE

l Auto Configure conflicts with Manual Configure of Client and Manual Configure of
Server. If you select Manual Configure of Client or Manual Configure of Server, make sure
that Auto Configure is set to Close.
l Auto Configure is applicable to the network that consists of a maximum of eight NEs. In the
auto mode, the ECC is configured automaticallyManual Configure of Client and Manual
Configure of Server are applicable to the network that consists of more than eight NEs. In the
manual mode, the ECC needs to be configured manually.

Step 3 When the configuration of the ECC parameters takes effect, List of ECC Link Layer
Management lists the specific information for the current state.

----End

E-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

F Glossary

Glossary

A
Alarm

A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a


failure or an emergency has occurred. See also Event.

APD

Avalanche Photodiode. A semiconductor photo detector with integral


detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction
are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons.
APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other
semiconductor electronics.

Attenuation

Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in


decibels.

Attenuator

A passive component that attenuates an electrical or optical signal.

B
Back up

A method to copy the important data into a backing storage in case that
the original is damaged or corrupted.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Cabling ladder

The ladder between the cabinet and the cabling rack, which is used for
cable routing.

Cabling

The methods to route the cables or fibers.

Channel

The smallest subdivision of a circuit that provides a type of


communication service; usually a path with only one direction.

Client

A kind of terminal (PC or workstation) connected to a network that can


send instructions to a server and get results through a user interface. See
also server.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

F-1

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

F Glossary

Configuration
data

The data that configures the NE hardware for coordination between this
NE and other NEs in the entire network, and for operation of specified
services. Configuration data is the instruction file of NEs, and it is a key
element to ensure that the network runs efficiently. The typical
configuration data includes board configuration, clock configuration and
protection relationship.

Connection

A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional


connections" capable of simultaneously transferring information in
opposite directions between their respective inputs and outputs.

CWDM

Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology for


transmitting signals at multiple wavelengths through the same fiber with
wide spacing between optical channels. Typical spacing is several
nanometers or more.

D
Drop

The port on a network element where the service to an end customer may
be connected, e.g., a tributary card on a SONET ADM. For example, a
drop for a DS1 customer service may be provided by a VT1.5 card
terminating a VT1.5 trail.

DWDM

Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology utilizes the


characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode
optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency
spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit
simultaneously in the same fiber.

E
Ethernet

A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers.
It is a broadcast networking technology that can use several different
physical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet
usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernet
networks.

F-2

Fault

A fault is the inability of a function to perform a required action. This


does not include an inability due to preventive maintenance, lack of
external resources, or planned actions.

Fiber connector

A device mounted on the end of a fiber-optic cable, light source, receiver,


or housing that mates to a similar device to couple light into and out of
optical fibers. A connector joins two fiber ends, or one fiber end and a
light source or detector.

Fiber jumper

The fiber which is used to connect the subrack with the ODF.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

F Glossary

H
Hardware
loopback

A method to use a fiber to connect the receiving optical interface with the
transmitting one on a board. It performs transmission tests, which method
usually does not require the assistance of personnel at the served terminal.

L
Label

A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.

Laser

The device that generates the directional light covering a narrow range of
wavelengths. Laser light is more coherent than ordinary light.
Semiconductor diode lasers are the used light source in fiber-optic system.

Link

A "topological component" that provides transport capacity between two


endpoints in different subnetworks via a fixed (i.e., inflexible routing)
relationship. The endpoints are "subnetwork termination point pools" for
SONET, and link termination points for ATM. Multiple links may exist
between a pair of subnetworks. A link also represents a set of "link
connections".

Loopback

The fault of each path on the optical fibre can be located by setting
loopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopback
modes: No loopback, Outloop, Inloop.

M
Multiplexer

An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a


fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the
tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.

N
NE database

The database that is saved in the SCC board. There are three types of
databases on the SCC board as follows: (1) DRDB: a dynamic database
in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery; (2) SDB: a static database in a
power-down RAM; (3) FDB0, FDB1: permanently saved databases in a
Flash ROM. In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in
DRDB and SDB at the same time. Backing up an NE database means
backing up the NE configuration data from SDB to FDB0 and FDB1.

Network
segment

The range of IP addresses in which the gateway NE will operate.

O
OADM

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer. A device that can be used to add the


optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical
signals of various wavelengths from one channel.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

F-3

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

F Glossary

ODF

Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool


fibers.

ONE

Optical Network Element. A stand-alone physical entity in an optical


transmission network that supports at least network element functions.

Optical interface

A device to allow two or more corresponding optical transmitting units


to be connected.

Optical spectrum
analyzer

An instrument that scans the spectrum to record power, measures the


value of loss insertion and tests the performance of the wavelength and
optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) of each channel.

OSC

Optical Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes communication


among nodes in optical transmission network and transmits the
monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working
channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is
1625 nm).

OSNR

Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio. Ratio of the optical power of the


transmitted optical signal to the noise on the received signal.

OTM

Optical Terminal Multiplexer. A device that multiplex or demultiplex


optical signals into a transmission link or into the client side.

OTU

Optical Transponder Unit. A device that access service signals compliant


with standards at the client side and convert them into standard DWDM
or CWDM wavelengths.

Output optical
power

The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

F-4

Pane

A major separate area of a window or dialog box, usually used for display
rather than data entry.

Path

A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format


for the signal at the given rate is assembled, and the point at which the
standard frame format for the signal is disassembled.

PIN

Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region


separating the p- and n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is
used in fiber-optic receivers.

Pointer

An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container


with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is
supported.

Power box

A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet,


which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.

Procedure

A generic term for an action.

Process

A generic term for a collection of actions.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

F Glossary

R
Receiver
overload

Receiver overload is the maximum acceptable value of the received


average power at point R.

Receiver
sensitivity

Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of


average received power at point R.

S
SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport


structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads
over physical transmission networks.

SONET

Synchronous Optical Network. A North American standard for


Synchronous Data Transfer over Optical Networks.

Service
protection

The measures to make sure the service transmitting not to be damaged or


corrupted.

Side panel

The panel on the side of the cabinet.

Support

The frame on the bottom of a cabinet, when installing the cabinet on the
antistatic floor.

V
VLAN

Virtual local area network. A subset of the active topology of a Bridged


Local Area Network. Associated with each VLAN is a VLAN Identifier
(VID).

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

Washer

A washer which is used to level the cabinet.

WDM

Wavelength-Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the


characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode
optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows
multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.

WTR

Wait to Restore. This command is issued when working channels meet


the restoral threshold after an SD or SF condition. It is used to maintain
the state during the WTR period unless it is pre-empted by a higher
priority bridge request.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

F-5

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

G Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
APD

Avalanche Photo Diode

D
DWDM

Dense Wave Division Multiplexer

F
FEC

Forward error correction

FOADM

Fixed Optical add/drop Multiplexer

I
IC

Integrated Circuit

ID

Identity

IP

Internet Protocol

L
LAN

Local Area Network

LCT

Local Craft Terminal

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)

NE

Network Element

NM

Network Management

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

G-1

OptiX OSN 1800


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

G Acronyms and Abbreviations

O
OADM

Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OAM

Operation Administration and Maintenance

ODF

Optical Distribution Frame

ODUk

Optical Channel Data Unit-k

OSC

Optical Supervisory Channel

OSN

Optical Switch Node

OSNR

Optical Signal-to-noise Ratio

OTN

Optical Transmission Network

OTM

Optical Transport Module

OTU

Optical Transponder Unit

P
PGND

Protection Ground

PIN

Positive Intrinsic Negative

S
SCC

System Control & Communication

SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SNCP

Subnetwork Connection Protection

V
VLAN

Virtual Local Area Network

W
WDM

G-2

Wavelength Division Multiplex

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-30)